六随念的注释巴利
7. Chaanussatiniddesavaṇṇanā
1. 佛随念论注释巴利
1. Buddhānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
123 “不净之后”是指在修不净业处之后。“在诸随念中”是指在随念的业处当中。为了说明“随念就是一再地忆念”这个意思,先说了“由于反复生起”,接着为了说明这里“念”这个词并不是因为和“随”这个音结合就表达别的意思,所以又说“念本身就是随念”。这样就表明:这里的“随”字不像“被获得”等词里的“upa”那样没有意义,也不像“了知、遍知”等词里的“saṃ”等那样表示别的含义。又通过“因为只在应当生起的地方生起”这一句,说明了随念与应当忆念的对象相应;为了说明只与生起者相应,所以说“与善男子相应”,或者说与因信出家者的善男子相应。所谓相应,正是因为与应当生起的地方相应,才说只与生起者相应,而不是与两者都相应。“相应”也就是“适合”的意思。“佛”是指依于世尊的那些功德而施设“佛”这个假名,这里是把那些功德总摄起来说的。因此说“以佛功德为所缘的念,这是它的同义词”。“缘”是指依止、取为所缘。“法”是指与教法一起的九种出世间法。难道涅槃不会另外作为业处来说吗?虽然会另外说,但由于法的共同性,在这里与道果一起被经典所摄,所以应当知道那也是属于法随念业处的;然而由于无为等性而区别于道果,所以又把它单独作为业处来说。至于戒随念等三种随念,则因为瑜伽行者应当以自身的戒、舍、信等作为随念处,所以单独作为业处来说。说“到达色身”,是指以自身的父母所生身为所缘而现起。说“于身”,是指在身为境中。说“以发等部分之相为所缘”,是指以头发等部分的不净相为所缘。为了说明在此之前的七种随念中没有相的生起,而在这里有,所以举出“相”。同样,“以入出息相为所缘”在这里也是如此。“寂静”是指一切行息灭,也就是涅槃的意思。巴利
123.Asubhānantaranti asubhakammaṭṭhānānantaraṃ. Anussatīsūti anussatikammaṭṭhānesu. ‘‘Anu anu sati anussatī’’ti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ uppajjanato’’ti vatvā na ettha anu-saddayogena sati-saddo atthantaravācakoti dassetuṃ ‘‘satiyeva anussatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena nāyamanu-saddo ‘‘upalabbhatī’’tiādīsu upa-saddo viya anatthako, nāpi ‘‘sañjānanaṃ pajānana’’ntiādīsu saṃ-saddādayo viya atthantaradīpakoti dasseti. ‘‘Pavattitabbaṭṭhānamhiyeva vā pavattattā’’ti iminā ca anussatiyā anussaritabbānurūpatā vuttā hotīti pavattakasseva anurūpataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kulaputtassa anurūpā’’ti vuttaṃ, saddhāpabbajitassa vā kulaputtassa. Anurūpatā nāma pavattitabbaṭṭhānassa anurūpatāya eva hotīti pavattakasseva anurūpatā vuttā, na ubhayassa. Anurūpāti ca yuttāti attho. Buddhanti ye guṇe upādāya bhagavati ‘‘buddho’’ti paññatti, te guṇe ekajjhaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘buddhaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā etamadhivacana’’nti. Ārabbhāti ālambitvā. Dhammanti pariyattidhammena saddhiṃ navavidhampi lokuttaradhammaṃ. Nanu ca nibbānaṃ visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvena vakkhati? Kiñcāpi vakkhati, dhammabhāvasāmaññena pana maggaphalehi saddhiṃ idha pāḷiyā saṅgahitattā tassāpi dhammānussatikammaṭṭhāne gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, asaṅkhatāmatādibhāvena pana maggaphalehi visiṭṭhatāya tassa visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvena gahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Sīlānussatiādīnaṃ pana tissannaṃ anussatīnaṃ visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvena gahaṇaṃ yogāvacarassa attano eva sīlassa cāgassa saddhādīnañca anussatiṭṭhānabhāvena gahetabbattā. Rūpakāyaṃ gatāti attano karajakāyaṃ ārabbha ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattā. Kāyeti kāye visayabhūte. Koṭṭhāsanimittārammaṇāyāti kesādikoṭṭhāsesu paṭikkūlanimittārammaṇāya. Ito purimāsu sattasu anussatīsu natthi nimittuppatti , idha atthīti dassanatthaṃ nimitta-ggahaṇaṃ. Tathā assāsapassāsanimittārammaṇāyāti etthāpi. Upasamanti sabbasaṅkhārūpasamaṃ, nibbānanti attho.
124 124. 如实了知佛的功德之后生起的净信就是“不动摇的净信”,这是通过圣道而来的净信;或者与之类似的、不被各种邪见之风所动摇、无法被撼动的净信,具备这种净信的人,其佛随念的修习才能成就,其他人则不能成就。“在合适的住处”,是指如前所说远离十八种过失、具备五种条件的住处。“独处”,是指独自一人待在僻静之处。这显示了身远离。“宴默”,是指从种种所缘中收摄回来,即从外在的各种所缘中退回来,专注于业处,其含义是心与业处善加密合。“如是”,便是依照这部经文中所示的方法。巴利
124. Avecca buddhaguṇe yāthāvato ñatvā uppanno pasādo aveccappasādo, ariyamaggena āgatappasādo, taṃsadisopi vā yo diṭṭhigatavātehi acalo asampakampiyo, tena samannāgatena. Tādisassa buddhānussatibhāvanā ijjhati, na itarassa. Patirūpasenāsaneti yathāvuttaaṭṭhārasadosavajjite pañcaṅgasamannāgate senāsane. Rahogatenāti rahasi gatena. Tena kāyavivekaṃ dasseti. Paṭisallīnenāti nānārammaṇato paṭisallīnena, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇato paṭikkamāpetvā kammaṭṭhāne sallīnena, susiliṭṭhacittenāti attho. Evanti imāya pāḷiyā āgatanayena.
“彼世尊”中的“彼”,说的是这样一位觉者:他圆满了三十种波罗蜜,摧毁了一切烦恼,证得了无上正等正觉,是诸天中的超胜之天、诸梵中的超胜之梵、世间的怙主,因为具足福运等种种原因,在包括天界在内的世间被广泛传扬“世尊”这个名号——就是他。“世尊”在这里是对导师名号的称扬。正如经中所说:“‘世尊’不是母亲取的名字”等等。而后面所说的“世尊”,则是就功德而作的称扬。在“阿拉汉”等九个名号处,各各配上“itipi”一词,以显示应当随念佛的功德,所以论师说“他随念:‘itipi 阿拉汉……itipi 世尊’”。就像在“itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ itipetaṃ tacchaṃ”(这是真实的,这是确实的)等语句中那样,“iti”一词有令事物近前呈现于眼前的作用,“pi”一词有总括的作用。由此显示了这些功德的众多。为了表明修习者应当修习这些辨识功德的因由,并使它们呈现在心中,论师说“这是说‘以此因和彼因’”。巴利
So bhagavāti ettha soti yo so samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho devānaṃ atidevo brahmānaṃ atibrahmā lokanātho bhāgyavantatādīhi kāraṇehi sadevake loke ‘‘bhagavā’’ti patthaṭakittisaddo, so. Bhagavāti idaṃ satthu nāmakittanaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kata’’ntiādi (mahāni. 198, 210; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 2). Parato pana bhagavāti guṇakittanaṃ. Arahantiādīsu navasu ṭhānesu paccekaṃ itipi-saddaṃ yojetvā buddhaguṇā anussaritabbāti dassento ‘‘itipi arahaṃ…pe… itipi bhagavāti anussaratī’’ti āha. ‘‘Itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ itipetaṃ taccha’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.6) viya iti-saddo āsannapaccakkhakaraṇattho, pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tena nesaṃ bahubhāvo dīpito, tāni ca guṇasallakkhaṇakāraṇāni bhāventena cittassa sammukhībhūtāni kātabbānīti dassento ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti āha.
125 所谓“远”,其实是像“近”一样,依所依而相对说的。为了显示那达到最高程度的远性,所以说“极远极远”,意思是:正因为极其遥远,才叫远。接着为了显示他从烦恼而言的远性,是因为那些烦恼已被彻底断除,所以说“因为以道摧毁了烦恼”。难道其他漏尽者不也断除了那些烦恼吗?针对这个问难,才说“连同习气”。因为除了世尊,其他人确实不能把烦恼连同习气一起断除。由此就显示了世尊的阿拉汉果与其他人的不共之处。那么,这个“习气”到底是什么呢?即使烦恼已断,仍然残留着一种由烦恼所安立的、能引发与未断烦恼时相似行为的特殊能力,就像具寿毕陵伽·婆蹉的卑语习气那样。问:说“远离”时,怎么能得出“从烦恼”这个意思呢?答:因为总说之词可以落在别义上,而别义之词不必用于总说。这里可以引用“他的那些恶不善法已远离”等经文为证。另外,这里的“ārakā”,是把“ā”缩短,又把“ka”变成“ha”,再加上随韵,依语法规则应知“araha”这个词就是这样成立的。为了便于把握上面说的这个意思,又说偈颂:“他因此名为远离。”其中,“具足者”就是具有者;“不具足”就是不拥有、不具足、不共存。巴利
125. Dūratā nāma āsannatā viya upādāyupādāya vuccatīti paramukkaṃsagataṃ dūrabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘suvidūravidūre’’ti āha, suṭṭhu vidūrabhāveneva vidūreti attho. Sā panassa kilesato dūratā tesaṃ sabbaso pahīnattāti dassento āha ‘‘maggena kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattā’’ti. Nanu aññesampi khīṇāsavānaṃ te pahīnā evāti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘savāsanāna’’nti. Na hi bhagavantaṃ ṭhapetvā aññe saha vāsanāya kilese pahātuṃ sakkonti , etena aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ bhagavato arahattanti dassitaṃ hoti. Kā panāyaṃ vāsanā nāma? Pahīnakilesassāpi appahīnakilesassa payogasadisapayogahetubhūto kilesanihito sāmatthiyaviseso āyasmato pilindavacchassa (pārā. 621) vasalasamudācāranimittaṃ viya. Kathaṃ pana ‘‘ārakā’’ti vutte ‘‘kilesehī’’ti ayamattho labbhatīti? Sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato, visesatthinā ca visesassa anupayojetabbato, ‘‘ārakāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā’’tiādīni (ma. ni. 1.434) suttapadānettha udāharitabbāni. Ārakāti cettha ā-kārassa rassattaṃ, ka-kārassa ca ha-kāraṃ, sānusāraṃ katvā niruttinayena ‘‘araha’’nti padasiddhi veditabbā. Vuttamevatthaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘so tato ārakā nāmā’’ti gāthābandhamāha. Tattha samañjanasīlo samaṅgī, na samaṅgitā asamaṅgitā asamannāgamo asahavuttitā.
126 126. 因为所作的是无益之事,烦恼本身就是敌人,所以叫“烦恼敌”。本来应当说“因为杀灭了敌人,所以是杀敌者”,但按照语言学的构词规则,说成了“阿拉汉”。巴利
126. Anatthacaraṇena kilesā eva arayoti kilesārayo. ‘‘Arīnaṃ hatattā arihā’’ti vattabbe niruttinayena ‘‘araha’’nti vuttaṃ.
127 所谓“这轮回之轮”,是就关联而说的。就像车轮的轮毂是根本组成部分一样,无明、有、渴爱所构成的三者,在内与外都同等安立,所以说“无明、有、渴爱所成的轮毂”。与轮毂和轮辋的关联相似,以无明、渴爱、老死为因与果,与它们相关联的福行等诸行,所以说“福等诸行为轮辐”。老死在各种有中作为边际而明显,因此把它放在轮辋的位置,说“老死为轮辋”。又像车轴是车轮转动的主要因,轮回之轮的转动也以漏的集起为主要因,所以说“以漏集所成的轴贯穿”。漏本身就是无明等的因,所以叫漏集。正如所说:“由漏集起故,无明集起。”异熟、造业、色等差别,即欲有等三有,这就是车乘,在这三有车乘中。由各自的缘平等地、或从最初就完全地联结,所以是善联结。因为它在无始的时间中流转,所以说为无始时流转。巴利
127. Yañcetaṃ saṃsāracakkanti sambandho. Rathacakkassa nābhi viya mūlāvayavabhūtaṃ anto, bahi ca samavaṭṭhitaṃ avijjābhavataṇhāmayaṃ dvayanti vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhī’’ti. Nābhiyā, nemiyā ca sambandhā arasadisā paccayaphalabhūtehi avijjātaṇhājarāmaraṇehi sambandhā puññādisaṅkhārāti vuttaṃ ‘‘puññādiabhisaṅkhārāra’’nti. Tattha tattha bhave pariyantabhāvena pākaṭaṃ jarāmaraṇanti taṃ nemiṭṭhāniyaṃ katvā āha ‘‘jarāmaraṇanemī’’ti. Yathā ca rathacakkapavattiyā padhānakāraṇaṃ akkho, evaṃ saṃsāracakkapavattiyā āsavasamudayoti āha ‘‘āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā’’ti. Āsavā eva avijjādīnaṃ kāraṇattā āsavasamudayo. Yathāha ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103). Vipākakaṭattārūpappabhedo kāmabhavādiko tibhavo eva ratho, tasmiṃ tibhavarathe. Attano paccayehi samaṃ, sabbaso vā ādito paṭṭhāya yojitanti samāyojitaṃ. Ādirahitaṃ kālaṃ pavattatīti katvā anādikālappavattaṃ.
诸蕴、诸界与诸处的次第,
无间断地流转着,这就叫作轮回。巴利
‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, ‘saṃsāro’ti pavuccatī’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.95 apasādanāvaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.60; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.199) –
这样说的轮回本身就是轮回之轮。所谓“以此”,即由世尊。“在菩提座”是指在名为菩提的智慧达到坛场状态的地方,或者指那个时候。“以精进之足”是指以自己称为精进的双足,这两只脚以两种方式运作,在杂染分和清净分中分别承担压制和安放的作用。“在戒地”中,戒本身就是地,因为它有安立的意义,就在这戒地上。“安立”是指通过成就而站稳。“以信之手”中,信本身就是手,因为它能拿起无过失的法,以此。“业尽作者”是指能灭尽身业等一切种类的业,所以叫业尽作者。“智斧”是指拿起在定石上磨得非常锋利的道智之斧。巴利
Evaṃ vuttasaṃsārova saṃsāracakkaṃ. Anenāti bhagavatā. Bodhimaṇḍeti bodhisaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa maṇḍabhāvappatte ṭhāne, kāle vā. Vīriyapādehīti saṃkilesavodānapakkhiyesu sannirumbhanasannikkhipanakiccatāya dvidhā pavattehi attano vīriyasaṅkhātehi pādehi. Sīlapathaviyanti patiṭṭhaṭṭhena sīlameva pathavī, tassaṃ. Patiṭṭhāyāti sampādanavasena patiṭṭhahitvā. Saddhāhatthenāti anavajjadhammādānasādhanato saddhāva hattho, tena. Kammakkhayakaranti kāyakammādibhedassa sabbassapi kammassa khayakaraṇato kammakkhayakaraṃ. Ñāṇapharasunti samādhisilāyaṃ sunisitamaggañāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā.
128 128. 这样,在“因轮辐已被断除”这一句里,把所说的断除轮辐理解为像轮子一样的轮回,作了义理上的连接之后,现在为了依照缘起说法的次第来显示它,就说“或者”等语。其中,“无始轮回转”是指找不到开端、无法了知起始边际的轮回圈。“其余十法”是从行开始、到生结束的十法,就是轮辐。怎么理解呢?为了显示它们以无明为根、以老死为边际,从而与轮毂和轮辋相连,所以说“以无明为根、以老死为边际”。在“于苦等中”里,“苦等”指苦、集、灭、道。其中,对苦的无知,因为含摄在苦里面,又因为遮蔽了苦;对其余诸谛,则只是因为遮蔽。这里的“苦”指的是苦圣谛,因此把它按欲有等分成三类,并依次显示如此遮蔽它的无明,以及在无明等缘下于三有中的行等,所以说“于欲有有无明”等。其中,“于欲有有无明”是指遮蔽欲有过患的无明。“于色有、无色有有无明”也是同样的道理。“于欲有之行”指属于欲地的诸行,或者说,将在欲有中产生的诸行,也就是能产生欲有投生的行。“成为缘”是指:对福行来说,以所缘缘和依止缘两种方式成为缘;对非福行来说,对俱生者以俱生等方式,对非俱生者以无间、等无间等方式,对非无间者则以所缘缘和依止缘方式成为缘。“于无色有之行”指不动行。成为缘,只是以依止缘的方式。不过,在这里详细展开的话就太繁琐了,而且这个义理后面自然会讲到,所以我不展开详说。巴利
128. Evaṃ ‘‘arānaṃ hatattā’’ti ettha vuttaaraghāte saṃsāraṃ cakkaṃ viya cakkanti gahetvā atthayojanaṃ katvā idāni paṭiccasamuppādadesanākkamenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha anamataggaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭanti anu anu amataggaṃ aviññātakoṭikaṃ saṃsāramaṇḍalaṃ. Sesā dasa dhammā saṅkhārādayo jātipariyosānā arā. Kathaṃ? Nābhiyā avijjāya mūlato, nemiyā jarāmaraṇena antato sambandhattāti dassento āha ‘‘avijjāmūlakattā jarāmaraṇapariyantattā cā’’ti. Dukkhādīsūti dukkhasamudayanirodhamaggesu. Tattha dukkhe aññāṇaṃ tadantogadhattā, tappaṭicchādanato ca, sesesu paṭicchādanatova. Dukkhanti cettha dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ adhippetanti taṃ kāmabhavādivasena tidhā bhinditvā tathā tappaṭicchādikaṃ avijjaṃ, avijjādipaccaye tīsu bhavesu saṅkhārādike ca paṭipāṭiyā dassento ‘‘kāmabhave ca avijjā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kāmabhave avijjāti kāmabhave ādīnavappaṭicchādikā avijjā. Rūpabhave arūpabhave avijjāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kāmabhave saṅkhārānanti kāmabhūmipariyāpannānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ, kāmabhave vā nipphādetabbā ye saṅkhārā, tesaṃ kāmabhavūpapattinibbattakasaṅkhārānanti attho. Paccayo hotīti puññābhisaṅkhārānaṃ tāva ārammaṇapaccayena ceva upanissayapaccayena cāti dvidhā paccayo hoti. Apuññābhisaṅkhāresu sahajātassa sahajātādivasena , asahajātassa anantarasamanantarādivasena, nānantarassa pana ārammaṇavasena ceva upanissayavasena ca paccayo hoti. Arūpabhave saṅkhārānanti āneñjābhisaṅkhārānaṃ . Paccayo hoti upanissayavaseneva. Imasmiṃ panatthe ettha vitthāriyamāne atippapañco hoti, sayameva ca parato āgamissatīti na naṃ vitthārayāma.
三处,就是眼处、耳处、意处。一处,就是意处。按照这个方法,触等的分别也应该知道。在这里那里,那那一种渴爱,就是色渴爱等不同种类,是在这里那里的欲有等当中生起的渴爱。巴利
Tiṇṇaṃ āyatanānanti cakkhusotamanāyatanānaṃ. Ekassāyatanassāti manāyatanassa. Iminā nayena phassādīnampi vibhāgo veditabbo. Tattha tattha sā sā taṇhāti rūpataṇhādibhedā tattha tattha kāmabhavādīsu uppajjanakā taṇhā.
以渴爱为根本的论述太简略了,所以为了把取和有分开来详细说明,就说了“如何”等话。其中,用“我将享受诸欲”这句话,说的是欲渴爱的生起;同样,用“我将享受天界成就”等话也是这个意思。不过,这种渴爱因为是以强烈执取的方式生起的,所以就叫欲取,因此说“以欲取为缘”。所谓“正是以那”,就是正是以欲取为缘。巴利
Taṇhādimūlikā kathā atisaṃkhittāti taṃ, upādānabhave ca vibhajitvā vitthāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘kāme paribhuñjissāmī’’ti iminā kāmataṇhāpavattimāha. Tathā ‘‘saggasampattiṃ anubhavissāmī’’tiādīhi. Sā pana taṇhā yasmā bhusamādānavasena pavattamānā kāmupādānaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāmupādānapaccayā’’ti. Tathevāti kāmupādānapaccayā eva.
所谓“梵天界的成就”,就是色界梵天中的成就。因为经中说“一切三界之法,以可欲之义为欲”,所以有爱也属于欲取,因此说“就是以欲取为缘而修习慈”等。在其余以取为根本的修习中,这里的连接方式是这样的:有人执取“没有他世”的虚无见,他因为见取而以身体行恶行等,应当按前面所说的方式连接。另一个人执取“在某一种成就有的状态中,自我断灭”的断灭见,他为了往生那里而以身体行善行等,同样应当按前面所说的方式连接。又有人想“成为有色、意所成之后,自我断灭”,为了往生色界而修习道。修习圆满等,一切都应当按前面所说的方式理解。又有人想“生于无色有之后,自我断灭”,为了往生无色界而修习道。修习圆满等,一切都应当按前面所说的方式理解。应当知道,仅凭这些也就解释了以我语取为根本的连接方式。同样,依现法涅槃论也可以理解这种连接。又有人执取“依戒而清净”“以不净道为净道”,因为戒禁取而以身体行恶行等,一切都应当按前面所说的方式连接。巴利
Brahmalokasampattinti rūpībrahmaloke sampattiṃ. ‘‘Sabbepi tebhūmakā dhammā kāmanīyaṭṭhena kāmā’’ti (mahāni. 1; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 8 thoka visadisaṃ) vacanato bhavarāgopi kāmupādānamevāti katvā ‘‘kāmupādānapaccayā eva mettaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesupādānamūlikāsupīti etthāyaṃ yojanā – idhekacco ‘‘natthi paro loko’’ti natthikadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so diṭṭhupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādi vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ. Aparo ‘‘asukasmiṃ sampattibhave attā ucchijjatī’’ti ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so tatrūpapattiyā kāyena sucaritaṃ caratītiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Aparo ‘‘rūpī manomayo hutvā attā ucchijjatī’’ti rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti. Bhāvanāpāripūriyāti sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Aparo ‘‘arūpabhave uppajjitvā attā ucchijjatī’’ti arūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti. Bhāvanāpāripūriyāti sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Etāhiyeva attavādupādānamūlikāpi yojanā saṃvaṇṇitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādavasenāpi yojanā veditabbā. Aparo ‘‘sīlena suddhī’’ti ‘‘asuddhimaggaṃ suddhimaggo’’ti parāmasanto sīlabbatupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādinā sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
现在,为了展示轮回之轮,前面已经用“在欲有中,无明是诸行的缘”等说法,说明了无明等是缘、诸行等是缘所生。接着,作者引用《无碍解道》的巴利原文,以总结的方式加以显示,所以说“如是此”等。其中,就像诸行是由因所生,无明也同样由欲漏等而有因,所以说“此二者皆由因而生”。“把握缘”是指对名色的诸缘——无明等——加以确定并把握,这里用的是处格,表示应当完成这件事。“慧”是指被称为度疑清净的、能依各种相而了知的智慧。“法住智”就是对缘起的通达。而这个法住智,因为是透过超越三世的疑网而运作的,所以说“于过去时”等。依照同样的方式,也就是依照“无明为因”等关于无明所说的方式,应当把“诸行为因,识为因所生”等一切句子详细展开。巴利
Idāni yvāyaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ dassentena ‘‘kāmabhave avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hotī’’tiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayabhāvo, saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayuppannabhāvo ca dassito, tameva paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiṃ ānetvā nigamanavasena dassento ‘‘evaṃ aya’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yathā saṅkhārā hetunibbattā, evaṃ avijjāpi kāmāsavādinā sahetukā evāti āha ‘‘ubhopete hetusamuppannā’’ti. Paccayapariggaheti nāmarūpassa paccayānaṃ avijjādīnaṃ paricchijja gahaṇe, nipphādetabbe bhummaṃ. Paññāti kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhisaṅkhātā pakārato jānanā. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti paṭiccasamuppādāvabodho. Idañca dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ yasmā addhāttaye kaṅkhāmalavitaraṇavasena pavattati, tasmā ‘‘atītampi addhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Eteneva nayenāti etena ‘‘avijjā hetū’’tiādinā avijjāyaṃ vuttena nayena. ‘‘Saṅkhārā hetu, viññāṇaṃ hetusamuppanna’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.46) sabbapadāni vitthāretabbāni.
在这里,“略说”指的是无明等以及识等,也就是因和果。或者说,因为因和果被略说,所以叫“略说”,即无明等和识等。不过应当知道,是因为它们同属“略说”这一共性,才用了单数。这些略说按时间划分:过去的因、现在的果,现在的因、未来的果,这样一共四种。所以说“这里,前面的略说是过去时”等等。或者,“略说”这个词是部分的称呼,那么过去的因这部分就是第一略说,其余几部分也是这样。渴爱、取、有其实已经被包含在内了,因为它们同属烦恼和业的状态,而且如果没有它们,无明和诸行就无法完成各自的作用。业和渴爱作为助成的条件,以流转之义而成为业轮。巴利
Saṃkhippanti ettha avijjādayo, viññāṇādayo cāti saṅkhepo, hetu, vipāko ca. Hetu vipākoti vā saṃkhippatīti saṅkhepo, avijjādayo viññāṇādayo ca. Saṅkhepabhāvasāmaññena pana ekavacanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Te pana saṅkhepā atīte hetu, etarahi vipāko, etarahi hetu, āyatiṃ vipākoti evaṃ kālavibhāgena cattāro jātā. Tenāha ‘‘purimasaṅkhepo cettha atīto addhā’’tiādi. Saṅkhepa-saddo vā bhāgādhivacananti atīto hetubhāgo paṭhamo saṅkhepo. Esa nayo sesesupi. Taṇhupādānabhavā gahitāva honti kilesakammabhāvasāmaññato, tehi vinā avijjāsaṅkhārānaṃ sakiccākaraṇato ca. Kammaṃ taṇhā ca tassa sahakārīkāraṇaṃ hutvā vaṭṭanatthena kammavaṭṭaṃ.
识、名色、六处、触、受的生、老、坏灭状态,被称为“生老死”,因此说“因为以生老死之名指出了识等”。这些就是指识等。未来的果报轮,因为从现在之因执取了将来要生起的那些法。它们就是无明等。从行相来说:虽然没有依各自体性直接说出,但在每一种归类中它们被汇集起来,通过执取无明、行等而得以显示,所以叫行相;或者,过去因等的种类就是行相,因此说“从行相”。按过去因五支等分类,共有二十种。巴利
Viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanānaṃ jātijarābhaṅgāvatthā ‘‘jātijarāmaraṇa’’nti vuttāti āha ‘‘jātijarāmaraṇāpadesenaviññāṇādīnaṃniddiṭṭhattā’’ti. Imeti viññāṇādayo. Āyatiṃ vipākavaṭṭaṃ paccuppannahetuto bhāvīnaṃ anāgatānaṃ gahitattā. Teti avijjādayo. Ākāratoti sarūpato avuttāpi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ saṅgahe ākirīyanti avijjāsaṅkhārādiggahaṇehi pakāsīyantīti ākārā, atītahetuādīnaṃ vā pakārā ākārā, tato ākārato. Vīsatividhā honti atītehetupañcakādibhedato.
诸行与识之间有一个连接,因为果从因无间断地生起,所以这是因与果相关联的一个连接。有与生之间也是这样。而受与爱之间,因为因从果无间断地生起,所以这是果与因相关联的一个连接。因为即使是果法,也能成为其他具有因性之法的缘。巴利
Saṅkhāraviññāṇānaṃ antarā eko sandhīti hetuto phalassa avicchedappavattibhāvato hetuphalasambandhabhūto eko sandhi. Tathā bhavajātīnamantarā. Vedanātaṇhānamantarā pana phalato hetuno avicchedappavattibhāvato phalahetusambandhabhūto eko sandhi. Phalabhūtopi hi dhammo aññassa hetusabhāvassa dhammassa paccayo hotīti.
所谓“如是”,是对前面所说那种方式的指称。因此说“四略说”等等。“以一切行相”:就是以此处已说的,以及未说而见于《缘起分别》(《分别论》225等)、无边际理趣和一切处论等中的一切行相。“知”就是明白通达。“见”就是以见为本质的智眼现前直接看见。“了知”就是通达,这是知、见二者的同义语。“彼”就是那了知。“以已知之义”:就是依照如实的状态而了知的意思。“以遍知之义”:就是以无常等行相而通达的意思。巴利
Itīti vuttappakāraparāmasanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catusaṅkhepa’’ntiādi. Sabbākāratoti idha vuttehi, avuttehi ca paṭiccasamuppādavibhaṅge (vibha. 225 ādayo), anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānādīsu ca āgatehi sabbehi ākārehi. Jānātīti avabujjhati. Passatīti dassanabhūtena ñāṇacakkhunā paccakkhato passati. Aññāti paṭivijjhatīti tesaṃyeva vevacanaṃ. Tanti taṃ jānanaṃ. Ñātaṭṭhenāti yathāsabhāvato jānanaṭṭhena. Pajānanaṭṭhenāti aniccādīhi pakārehi paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena.
现在,为了说明这个有轮被引到这里来的目的,就说了“以此”等话。其中,“那些法”指的是无明等法。“如实了知”就是用大金刚智如实了知。厌离者、以强力观慧离染者、解脱者,以诸圣道破除轮辐——这是句子的连接方式。其中,当世尊离染、解脱时,才叫作破除轮辐。之后,则是取正等觉那一刹那来说“破、破除、摧毁”。巴利
Idāni yadatthamidaṃ bhavacakkaṃ idhānītaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘iminā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha te dhammeti te avijjādike dhamme. Yathābhūtaṃ ñatvāti mahāvajirañāṇena yāthāvato jānitvā. Nibbindanto balavavipassanāya virajjanto vimuccanto ariyamaggehi are hanīti yojanā. Tattha yadā bhagavā virajjati vimuccati, tadā are hanati nāma. Tato paraṃ pana abhisambuddhakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘hani vihani viddhaṃsesī’’ti.
129 转轮王的轮宝是没有意识的,可它一出现,世人就在那个地方向它供养,别处的特殊供养就中断了。更何况正自觉者出现的时候呢?为了说明这一点,才说了“当如来出现时”等话。那其他供养的特殊之处又算得了什么呢?意思是说,跟前面所说的相比,那些由势力较小的天和人所作、并不怎么殊胜的其他供养,在应供者面前,还有什么好说的呢?“与义相应”,就是与阿拉汉果之义相应,随顺那个义。巴利
129. Cakkavattino acetane cakkaratane uppanne tattheva loko pūjaṃ karoti, aññattha pūjāvisesā pacchijjanti, kimaṅgaṃ pana sammāsambuddhe uppanneti dassento ‘‘uppanne tathāgate’’tiādimāha. Ko pana vādo aññesaṃ pūjāvisesānanti yathāvuttato aññesaṃ amahesakkhehi devamanussehi kariyamānānaṃ nātiuḷārānaṃ pūjāvisesānaṃ arahabhāve kā nāma kathā. Atthānurūpanti arahattatthassa anurūpaṃ anvatthaṃ.
130 “因为怕坏名声”的意思,就是害怕名声不好。有人偷偷做坏事,心里想“别让人知道”,但世尊从来不会这样做,因为在菩提树下,一切恶行的根源早已被彻底断除。另一种解释:“远离”就是阿拉汉,意思正是“离得极远”。那为什么说是离得极远呢?因为那些身未修、戒未修、心未修、慧未修的人,因此贪嗔痴未断,不通达圣法,在圣法中未受调伏,不见圣法,未踏上正道,反而走上邪道——世尊离他们极其遥远。世尊确实这样说过:巴利
130.Asilokabhayenāti akittibhayena. Raho pāpaṃ karonti ‘‘mā naṃ koci jaññā’’ti esa bhagavā na kadāci karoti pāpahetūnaṃ bodhimaṇḍe eva suppahīnattā. Aparo nayo – ārakāti arahaṃ, suvidūrabhāvatoicceva attho. Kuto pana suvidūrabhāvatoti? Ye abhāvitakāyā abhāvitasīlā abhāvitacittā abhāvitapaññā, tato eva appahīnarāgadosamohā ariyadhammassa akovidā ariyadhamme avinītā ariyadhammassa adassāvino appaṭipannā micchāpaṭipannā ca, tato suvidūrabhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,就算有比丘抓住我僧伽梨的衣角,一步一步紧跟着我走在后面,但如果他贪求诸欲、对欲有强烈的贪染、心怀嗔害、心存恶意、失念、不正知、心不集中、心思散乱、诸根放逸,那么他其实离我很远,我也离他很远。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为这样的比丘不见法;不见法的人,就看不见我。巴利
‘‘Saṅghāṭikaṇṇecepi me, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gahetvā piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandho assa pāde pādaṃ nikkhipanto, so ca hoti abhijjhālu kāmesu tibbasārāgo byāpannacitto paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo muṭṭhassati asampajāno asamāhito vibbhantacitto pākatindriyo. Atha kho so ārakāva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassa. Taṃ kissa hetu? Dhammaṃ hi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na passati, dhammaṃ apassanto maṃ na passatī’’ti (itivu. 92).
如前所述的那些人,即使早晚都待在导师身边,也不能因此就说他们“在导师身边”,导师对他们来说也同样不能称为在近边。所以,阿拉汉就是远离恶人、与恶人相隔遥远。巴利
Yathāvuttapuggalā hi sacepi sāyaṃ pātaṃ satthu santikāvacarāva siyuṃ, na te tāvatā ‘‘satthu santikā’’ti vattabbā, tathā satthāpi nesaṃ. Iti asappurisānaṃ ārakā dūreti arahaṃ.
志趣低劣之人,不循正道而行;
是故彼等远离世尊,阿拉汉由此被称为远。巴利
‘‘Sammā na paṭipajjanti, ye nihīnāsayā narā; Ārakā tehi bhagavā, dūre tenārahaṃ mato’’ti.
同样地,阿拉汉即“远离”,其义亦为“亲近”。那为什么说是亲近呢?因为那些已修身、已修戒、已修心、已修慧,并因此断除了贪嗔痴,通达圣法,在圣法中受到良好调伏,已得见圣法,正行于道的人——正是从这个意义上说,世尊与他们亲近。世尊也确实这样说过:巴利
Tathā ārakāti arahaṃ, āsannabhāvatoti attho. Kuto pana āsannabhāvatoti? Ye bhāvitakāyā bhāvitasīlā bhāvitacittā bhāvitapaññā, tato eva pahīnarāgadosamohā ariyadhammassa kovidā ariyadhamme suvinītā ariyadhammassa dassāvino sammāpaṭipannā, tato āsannabhāvato. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,即使一位比丘住在一百由旬之外,只要他不贪求诸欲、对诸欲没有强烈的贪染、心无嗔恨、没有恶意念头,正念现前、具足正知、入定、心一境性、守护诸根,那么他其实就在我身边,我也在他身边。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为这位比丘见到了法,见到法的人就是见到了我。巴利
‘‘Yojanasate cepi me, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vihareyya, so ca hoti anabhijjhālu kāmesu na tibbasārāgo abyāpannacitto appaduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo upaṭṭhitassati sampajāno samāhito ekaggacitto saṃvutindriyo. Atha kho so santikeva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassa. Taṃ kissa hetu? Dhammaṃ hi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu passati, dhammaṃ passanto maṃ passatī’’ti (itivu. 92).
像这样的人,即使和导师相隔一千由旬,也不能因此就说他们是“远离导师的人”,导师对他们来说也一样不是远离。所以,善人即使远在千里,也依然是亲近的——这就是阿拉汉。巴利
Tathārūpā hi puggalā satthu yojanasahassantarikāpi honti, na tāvatā te ‘‘satthu dūracārino’’ti vattabbā, tathā satthāpi nesaṃ. Iti sappurisānaṃ ārakā āsanneti arahaṃ.
彼等正行、志乐极净者,
远离(染污)而近在咫尺;是故彼为阿拉汉、胜者。巴利
Ye sammā paṭipajjanti, suppaṇītādhimuttikā; Ārakā tehi āsanne, tenāpi arahaṃ jino.
那些贪之类的恶法,在谁的相续中生起,就会给那个人带来现世和来世的祸害,而且和导向涅槃的修行道路完全是背道而驰的。那些致力于圆满自身利益和他人利益、正确修行的善士们,应当远远地避开它们、舍弃它们、断除它们,所以它们被称为“应远离的”。而这些恶法,世尊在菩提树下就已经用圣道彻底断除、根绝了。正如所说的——巴利
Ye ime rāgādayo pāpadhammā yasmiṃ santāne uppajjanti, tassa diṭṭhadhammikampi samparāyikampi anatthaṃ āvahanti. Nibbānagāminiyā paṭipadāya ekaṃseneva ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā ca, te attahitaṃ, parahitañca paripūretuṃ sammā paṭipajjantehi sādhūhi dūrato rahitabbā pariccajitabbā pahātabbāti rahā nāma, te ca yasmā bhagavato bodhimūleyeva ariyamaggena sabbaso pahīnā samucchinnā. Yathāha –
婆罗门,如来的贪、嗔、痴已经断除,一切恶不善法都已断尽,连根拔起,像截断的多罗树一样不再生长,归于无有,未来再也不会生起。巴利
‘‘Tathāgatassa kho, brāhmaṇa, rāgo pahīno doso moho, sabbepi pāpakā akusalā dhammā pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṃkatā āyatiṃ anuppādadhammā’’ti (pārā. 9-10 atthato samānaṃ).
所以,他完全没有raha,本应说成“araho”;为了顺口,把“o”替换成“a”,就说成“arahaṃ”(应供)。巴利
Tasmā sabbaso na santi etassa rahāti arahoti vattabbe okārassa sānusāraṃ a-kārādesaṃ katvā ‘‘araha’’nti vuttaṃ.
恶法被称为“应远离的”,因为善士应当远离它们。
因为世尊已经彻底断除了它们,所以被称为阿拉汉。巴利
Pāpadhammā rahā nāma, sādhūhi rahitabbato; Tesaṃ suṭṭhu pahīnattā, bhagavā arahaṃ mato.
那些已经完全遍知诸蕴、断尽烦恼、修习圆满正道、亲证寂灭的漏尽阿拉汉,那些尚未证得无上轭安稳、仍安住于希求的有学,以及那些修行清净、志向贤善、具足信戒闻等功德的个人——他们不应舍弃世尊,不应抛弃世尊,世尊也不应舍弃他们,因此称为阿拉汉。确实如此,因为圣者们由于亲自现见导师所见之法,所以与导师的法身从未分离。正如具寿宾吉耶所说:巴利
Ye te sabbaso pariññātakkhandhā pahīnakilesā bhāvitamaggā sacchikatanirodhā arahanto khīṇāsavā, ye ca sekkhā appattamānasā anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ patthayamānā viharanti, ye ca parisuddhapayogā kalyāṇajjhāsayā saddhāsīlasutādiguṇasampannā puggalā, tehi na rahitabbo na pariccajitabbo, te ca bhagavatāti arahaṃ. Tathā hi ariyapuggalā satthārā diṭṭhadhammassa paccakkhakaraṇato satthu dhammasarīrena avirahitā eva honti. Yathāha āyasmā piṅgiyo –
我用内心去看他,就像用眼睛亲眼看见一样,
婆罗门,我日夜都不放逸;
我恭敬礼拜着,就这样度过夜晚。
因此我认为是不分离。
信、喜、意、念,
皆不离去乔达摩之教。
广慧者无论去往哪个方向,
我向他就在那个方向礼敬。巴利
‘‘Passāmi naṃ manasā cakkhunāva, Rattindivaṃ brāhmaṇa appamatto; Namassamāno vivasemi rattiṃ, Teneva maññāmi avippavāsaṃ. ‘‘Saddhā ca pīti ca mano sati ca, Nāpentime gotamasāsanamhā; Yaṃ yaṃ disaṃ vajati bhūripañño, Sa tena teneva natohamasmī’’ti. (su. ni. 1148-1149);
正是因为这个原因,他们不另外依止别的导师。就像所说的那样:巴利
Teneva ca te aññaṃ satthāraṃ na uddisanti. Yathāha –
比丘们,一个人如果具足正见,却去认别的导师,这是不可能的,绝没有这种事。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.128; a. ni. 1.276).
即使是善凡夫,大多数也对导师怀有坚定不移的信仰。因此,因为不应被那些修行善好的殊胜之人所远离,而他们也不远离他,所以他没有应被善人舍弃的隐秘过恶,也没有善人应当舍弃他的隐秘过失,因此他是阿拉汉。巴利
Kalyāṇaputhujjanāpi yebhuyyena satthari niccalasaddhā eva honti. Iti suppaṭipannehi purisavisesehi avirahitabbato, tesañca avirahanato na santi etassa rahā pariccajanakā, natthi vā etassa raho sādhūhi pariccajitabbatāti arahaṃ.
亲证正法诸圣者,行境清净;
彼不远离彼等,是故名为依怙、应供。巴利
‘‘Ye sacchikatasaddhammā, ariyā suddhagocarā; Na tehi rahito hoti, nātho tenārahaṃ mato’’ti.
而“离去”称为行走。世尊并没有在种种趣处流转、名为轮回的行走,因为在菩提树下,能灭尽业的圣道已经把连同一切资粮的业轮彻底摧毁了。正如所说的:巴利
Rahoti ca gamanaṃ vuccati, bhagavato ca nānāgatīsu paribbhamanasaṅkhātaṃ saṃsāre gamanaṃ natthi kammakkhayakarena ariyamaggena bodhimūleyeva sabbaso sasambhārassa kammavaṭṭassa viddhaṃsitattā. Yathāha –
凭这个,我或许会投生为天神,或者成为甘塔拔,或者变成飞鸟;
凭这个,我可能投生为夜叉,也可能受生为人身;
我的那些漏已经灭尽,被摧毁,像芦苇一样被彻底断除。巴利
‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo; Yakkhattaṃ yena gaccheyyaṃ, manussattañca abbaje; Te mayhaṃ āsavā khīṇā, viddhastā vinaḷīkatā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.36);
他不再有隐秘独行,也不会在诸趣中再次受生,所以称为阿拉汉。巴利
Evaṃ natthi etassa rahogamanaṃ gatīsu paccājātītipi arahaṃ.
于轮回中,彼尽无隐秘之行;
已断生死,彼为阿拉汉、善逝、正知者。巴利
Raho vā gamanaṃ yassa, saṃsāre natthi sabbaso; Pahīnajātimaraṇo, arahaṃ sugato mato.
世尊也因为值得赞叹而称为应供。文字学者们把“应供”这个词解释为“值得赞叹”。而世尊值得赞叹这一点,不是其他人也能共同拥有的,它是依如实证得的功德而来的,在包括天人在内的世间中牢牢确立。因为,当人们按每一种功德分别讲述他——以无上的戒、无上的定、无上的慧、无上的解脱,他是无等、与无等者相等、无譬、无比、无对者——的时候,即使是智者、天人、梵天,或者世尊自己,也都无法把话说完。所以,世尊也因值得赞叹而称为应供。巴利
Pāsaṃsattā vā bhagavā arahaṃ. Akkharacintakā hi pasaṃsāyaṃ araha-saddaṃ vaṇṇenti. Pāsaṃsabhāvo ca bhagavato anaññasādhāraṇo yathābhuccaguṇādhigato sadevake loke suppatiṭṭhito. Tathā hesa anuttarena sīlena anuttarena samādhinā anuttarāya paññāya anuttarāya vimuttiyā asamo asamasamo appaṭimo appaṭibhāgo appaṭipuggaloti evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ guṇe vibhajitvā vuccamāne paṇḍitapurisehi devehi brahmehi bhagavatā vā pana pariyosāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyarūpo. Iti pāsaṃsattāpi bhagavā arahaṃ.
在包括天人在内的世间里,没有任何人能在功德上和他相比。
因此,也因为他值得赞叹,阿拉汉是两足者中最殊胜的。巴利
Guṇehi sadiso natthi, yasmā loke sadevake; Tasmā pāsaṃsiyattāpi, arahaṃ dvipaduttamo.
如是,从一切方面来说——巴利
Evaṃ sabbathāpi –
此于愚钝者为远,于了知者亦为远;
因诸隐秘已彻底断除,故堪受智者供养。
他在各种生命存在状态中没有任何隐秘,所以值得赞叹,是阿拉汉、胜者。巴利
‘‘Ārakā mandabuddhīnaṃ, ārakā ca vijānataṃ; Rahānaṃ suppahīnattā, vidūnamaraheyyato; Bhavesu ca rahābhāvā, pāsaṃsā arahaṃ jino’’ti.
131 “正”是不颠倒。“自己”就是亲自。在这里,“正觉者”这个词里的“正”要理解为表示“自己”这个意思。“一切法”是指没有剩余的、应当了知的一切法。那么,这里怎么能得到对一切法的觉悟呢?因为没有把握部分。只要没有把握部分,就能知道所把握的是没有剩余的,就像说“受了戒的人不给”一样。这样一来,应当知道“佛陀”这个词只是在主动者意义上成立,不需要另外看什么特殊含义,因为这里并没有要用被动表达的意思。因为这里从字面上只能得到“正确地、自己觉悟,所以是正自觉者”这么多,而“一切法”则是从义理上可以得到的,取来而说。并不是说觉悟的作用没有对象还能成立。巴利
131.Sammāti aviparītaṃ. Sāmanti sayameva. Sambuddhoti hi ettha saṃ-saddo ‘‘saya’’nti etassa atthassa bodhako daṭṭhabbo. Sabbadhammānanti anavasesānaṃ ñeyyadhammānaṃ. Kathaṃ panettha sabbadhammāvabodho labbhatīti? Ekadesassa aggahaṇato. Padesaggahaṇe hi asati gahetabbassa nippadesatāva viññāyati yathā ‘‘dikkhito na dadātī’’ti. Evañca katvā atthavisesānapekkhā kattari eva buddhasaddasiddhi veditabbā kammavacanicchāya abhāvato. ‘‘Sammā sāmaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho’’ti ettakameva hi idha saddato labbhati, ‘‘sabbadhammāna’’nti pana atthato labbhamānaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Na hi bujjhanakiriyā avisayā yujjati.
现在,为了把“一切法”这个总说的范围分别开来显示,所以说了“应证知之法”等。其中,“应证知”是指应当用殊胜的智慧去了知。那么,哪些是应证知的呢?就是四谛法。从应证知的角度说“觉悟”,是就应证知的体性而觉悟。在前分以观慧,在证得的刹那以道慧,在后分以一切知智等了知,这是它的含义。以下各处也是同样的道理。“应遍知之法”说的是苦圣谛。“应断除”说的是集谛所摄。“应作证”是就涅槃而说。不过,这里用复数词来表述,是依有余依等道理成立的差别而说,或者这是对四谛法的总说。正如后面将要说的“眼是苦谛”等那样。总说是依未确定界限的法而作,因为以总说列举的法,只是说它们存在,并不确定界限,所以用无界限的复数词来说,如“无因法、无为法”那样。又或者,“应作证”也包含果与解脱,不只是涅槃,所以用复数表述。同样地,“应修习”中也要知道包含禅那。巴利
Idāni tassā visayaṃ ‘‘sabbadhamme’’ti sāmaññato vuttaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘abhiññeyye dhamme’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha abhiññeyyeti abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena jānitabbe. Ke pana teti? Catusaccadhamme. Abhiññeyyato buddhoti abhiññeyyabhāvato bujjhi. Pubbabhāge vipassanāpaññāya, adhigamakkhaṇe maggapaññāya, aparabhāge sabbaññutaññāṇādīhi aññāsīti attho. Ito paresupi eseva nayo. Pariññeyye dhammeti dukkhaṃ ariyasaccamāha. Pahātabbeti samudayapakkhiye. Sacchikātabbeti nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Bahuvacananiddeso pana sopādisesādikaṃ pariyāyasiddhaṃ bhedaṃ gahetvā kato, uddeso vā ayaṃ catusaccadhammānanti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘cakkhuṃ dukkhasacca’’ntiādi. Uddeso ca avinicchitatthaparicchedassa dhammassa vasena karīyati. Uddesena hi uddisiyamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ atthitāmattaṃ vuccati, na paricchedoti aparicchedena bahuvacanena vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘appaccayā dhammā, asaṅkhatā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 7-8). Sacchikātabbeti vā phalavimuttīnampi gahaṇaṃ, na nibbānassevāti bahuvacananiddeso kato. Evañca bhāvetabbeti ettha jhānānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
偈颂里“应修习”这个说法中,“ca”这个词有集合未说之义的作用,由此应当知道,它也把“应作证”包含进来了。因此,“我是觉者”的意思是:因为四圣谛已被我觉悟,而且没有任何离开圣谛而应被了知的东西,所以我觉悟了一切应知之法,也就是我完全了知了。巴利
Gāthāyaṃ bhāvetabbañcāti ettha ca-saddo avuttasamuccayattho, tena sacchikātabbassa gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tasmā buddhosmīti yasmā cattāri saccāni mayā buddhāni, saccavinimuttañca kiñci ñeyyaṃ natthi, tasmā sabbampi ñeyyaṃ buddhosmi, abbhaññāsinti attho.
132 132. 为了把上面依真谛而总说的义理,连同门与所缘、以及依门而起的诸法,还有蕴等,都按真谛分别开显出来,所以接着开始说“再者”这一段。其中,“以根本因的方式”是说:即使无明等其他原因也存在,仍以它们当中的根本因这种方式来说。因为渴爱既是业呈现种种差别的因,又通过充当助伴而成为苦呈现种种差别的主要因。“能令生起”就是使之产生。“前渴爱”指前世所成就的渴爱。“两者”指眼以及眼的集起。“不转起”指不转起之因。“灭之知”指以作证现观而通达灭。“以各各句的抽绎”指如“眼、眼之集”等,以各各部分的确定。因为渴爱也有应遍知性,且摄于取蕴之中,为了显示苦谛所摄,故说“色爱等六爱身”。巴利
132. Evaṃ saccavasena sāmaññato vuttamatthaṃ dvārārammaṇehi saddhiṃ dvārappavattadhammehi, khandhādīhi ca saccavaseneva vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘api cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha mūlakāraṇabhāvenāti santesupi avijjādīsu aññesu kāraṇesu tesampi mūlabhūtakāraṇabhāvena. Taṇhā hi kammassa vicittabhāvahetuto, sahāyabhāvūpagamanato ca dukkhavicittatāya padhānakāraṇaṃ. Samuṭṭhāpikāti uppādikā. Purimataṇhāti purimabhavasiddhā taṇhā. Ubhinnanti cakkhussa , taṃsamudayassa ca. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ. Nirodhapajānanāti sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nirodhassa paṭivijjhanā. Ekekapaduddhārenāti ‘‘cakkhuṃ cakkhusamudayo’’tiādinā ekekakoṭṭhāsaniddhāraṇena . Taṇhāyapi pariññeyyabhāvasabbhāvato, upādānakkhandhantogadhattā ca dukkhasaccasaṅgahaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
遍处,就是遍处禅那。三十二相,是指三十二个部分,以及以这些部分为所缘的禅那。九有,是指欲有等三种、想有等三种、一蕴有等三种,一共九种有。四禅,是指未取所缘差别的四种色界禅那,或者这里指的是果报禅那。在这里应当知道,作为善法亲依止的渴爱,是能令先前渴爱生起者。至于唯作之法,则在它们成为那个自体之因的地方。巴利
Kasiṇānīti kasiṇajjhānāni. Dvattiṃsākārāti dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā, tadārammaṇajjhānāni ca. Nava bhavāti kāmabhavādayo tayo, saññībhavādayo tayo, ekavokārabhavādayo tayoti nava bhavā. Cattāri jhānānīti aggahitārammaṇavisesāni cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni, vipākajjhānānaṃ vā etaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Ettha ca kusaladhammānaṃ upanissayabhūtā taṇhā samuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhāti veditabbā. Kiriyadhammānaṃ pana yattha te tassa attabhāvassa kāraṇabhūtā.
所谓“随觉者”,是指对应当觉悟的法,按照它本来的样子而觉悟,所以称为佛陀。“由此”就是“因此”。因为无论从共同的特征还是从各别的特征,逐项分别来说,他都觉悟了一切法,所以才这样说。那么具体是怎么说的呢?说的是“正确地、由自己觉悟了一切法”。意思是:对一切所应知道的事物,以一切方式,毫无颠倒地,由自己亲自现前觉悟。通过这句话,说明他证得了不依赖他人教导、能以一切方式通达一切法、随心所欲而转的无碍智,也就是一切知智的证得。巴利
Anubuddhoti bujjhitabbadhammassa anurūpato buddho. Tenāti tasmā. Yasmā sāmaññato, visesato ca ekekapaduddhārena sabbadhamme buddho, tasmā vuttaṃ. Kinti āha ‘‘sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā’’ti, sabbassapi ñeyyassa sabbākārato aviparītaṃ sayameva abhisambuddhattāti attho. Imināssa paropadesarahitassa sabbākārena sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthassa ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhavuttino anāvaraṇañāṇasaṅkhātassa sabbaññutaññāṇassa adhigamo dassito.
难道一切知智之外还有另一种无碍智吗?不然的话,“六种不共智就是佛智”(《无碍解道·论母》1.73)这句话就矛盾了。并不矛盾。因为这是按照所缘境和运作方式的差别,为了显示它与其它智的不共之处,才把同一个智说成两种。实际上,那就是一个智:因为它以无余的有为法、无为法和假名法为所缘,所以叫一切知智;而在那里,由于没有障碍、无执无滞地运作,所以叫无碍智。正如《无碍解道》所说:“了知一切有为、无为、无余,所以叫一切知智;在那里没有障碍,所以叫无碍智”等等(《无碍解道》1.119)。因此,这两者在意义上没有差别,而且必须完全这样理解。否则,一切知智和无碍智就会变成共通的,而且会变成不以一切法为所缘。因为世尊的智连极微小的障碍都没有;如果无碍智不以一切法为所缘,那么在它不运作的地方就有障碍存在,那样它就不能叫无碍了。或者换个说法:就算无碍智与一切知智是另一个东西,但在这里,由于它在一切处都能无阻地运作,所以“无碍智”指的就是一切知智本身。而由于证得这个智,世尊才被称为“一切知者、一切知者、正自觉者”,并不是只因为一次通达一切法。正如《无碍解道》(1.162)所说:“这是诸佛世尊在菩提树下,与一切知智的获得同时现证的解脱终极安立,即‘佛’。”因为通过证得能觉悟一切法的智,世尊的相续中便有了通达无余诸法的能力。巴利
Nanu ca sabbaññutaññāṇato aññaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, aññathā ‘‘cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni buddhañāṇānī’’ti (paṭi. ma. mātikā 1.73) vacanaṃ virujjheyyāti? Na virujjhati, visayapavattibhedavasena aññehi asādhāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ ekasseva ñāṇassa dvidhā vuttattā. Ekameva hi taṃ ñāṇaṃ anavasesasaṅkhatāsaṅkhatasammutidhammavisayatāya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha ca āvaraṇābhāvato nissaṅgacāramupādāya ‘‘anāvaraṇañāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Yathāha paṭisambhidāyaṃ ‘‘sabbaṃ saṅkhatamasaṅkhataṃ anavasesaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha āvaraṇaṃ natthīti anāvaraṇañāṇa’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.119). Tasmā natthi nesaṃ atthato bhedo, ekantena cetaṃ evamicchitabbaṃ. Aññathā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇānaṃ sādhāraṇatā, asabbadhammārammaṇatā ca āpajjeyya. Na hi bhagavato ñāṇassa aṇumattampi āvaraṇaṃ atthi, anāvaraṇañāṇassa ca asabbadhammārammaṇabhāve yattha taṃ na pavattati, tatthāvaraṇasabbhāvato anāvaraṇabhāvoyeva na siyā. Atha vā pana hotu aññameva anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇato, idha pana sabbattha appaṭihatavuttitāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti sabbaññutaññāṇameva adhippetaṃ. Tassa cādhigamena bhagavā ‘‘sabbaññū, sabbavidū, sammāsambuddho’’ti ca vuccati na sakiṃyeva sabbadhammāvabodhato. Tathā ca vuttaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.162) ‘‘vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ ‘‘buddho’’ti. Sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthañāṇasamadhigamena hi bhagavato santāne anavasesadhamme paṭivijjhituṃ samatthatā ahosīti.
这里有人问:那么,这个智在运作时,是一次同时作用于一切所缘境,还是依次第作用的呢?对此又该怎么说呢?如果它确实是一次同时作用于一切所缘境,那么对于过去、未来、现在、内外等等各种不同类别的有为法,以及无为法和假名法,当它们同时呈现时,就像远远看着画布的人一样,无法分辨了知。这样一来,正在观照“一切法无我”的修行者,以无我的方式观照时,一切法就以未经区分的形态成为世尊之智的所缘——这就有过失了。那些主张“诸佛之智在一切时都以一切所知法的住立自相为所缘,没有分别而运作,因此他们被称为‘一切见者’;这样说来,‘行走时入定的龙象,站立时也入定’这句话也就说得通了”的人,也同样逃不过上述过失。而且,由于是以住立自相为所缘,过去、未来和假名法在彼时并不存在,世尊之智就只能以一部分为所缘了。因此,“智是一次同时运作”的说法并不成立。巴利
Etthāha – kiṃ panidaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattamānaṃ sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, udāhu kamenāti? Kiñcettha – yadi tāva sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, atītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhādibhedabhinnānaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ, asaṅkhatasammutidhammānañca ekajjhaṃ upaṭṭhāne dūrato cittapaṭaṃ pekkhantassa viya paṭivibhāgenāvabodho na siyā, tathā ca sati ‘‘sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti vipassantānaṃ anattākārena viya sabbadhammā anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇassa visayā hontīti āpajjati. Yepi ‘‘sabbañeyyadhammānaṃ ṭhitalakkhaṇavisayaṃ vikapparahitaṃ sabbakālaṃ buddhānaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattati, tena te ‘sabbavidū’ti vuccanti, evañca katvā ‘caraṃ samāhito nāgo, tiṭṭhantopi samāhito’ti idampi vacanaṃ suvuttaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti, tesampi vuttadosānātivatti, ṭhitalakkhaṇārammaṇatāya ca atītānāgatasammutidhammānaṃ tadabhāvato ekadesavisayameva bhagavato ñāṇaṃ siyā. Tasmā sakiṃyeva ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti na yujjati.
那么,智是依次在一切境界上生起的吗?这样说也不合理。因为所知法随着种类、地域、自性等,以及方位、时间等,有种种差别,如果是依次把握,由于所知法没有边际,就不可能对它毫无剩余地通达。那些这样说的人——“由于对意义没有欺诳,世尊现见所知的一部分之后,决定‘其余的也是这样’,由此成立为一切知者;而且这种智不是比量,因为没有疑惑。世间与疑惑相伴的才是比量智”——他们的说法也不合理。因为如果一切都不是现见,就不可能通过对意义没有欺诳而现见所知的一部分之后,决定“其余的也是这样”。因为那所谓“其余的”,就是非现见的。巴利
Atha kamena sabbasmiṃ visaye ñāṇaṃ pavattati? Evampi na yujjati. Na hi jātibhūmisabhāvādivasena, disādesakālādivasena ca anekabhedabhinne ñeyye kamena gayhamāne tassa anavasesapaṭivedho sambhavati, apariyantabhāvato ñeyyassa. Ye pana ‘‘atthassa avisaṃvādanato ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā ‘sesepi eva’nti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanena sabbaññū bhagavā, tañca ñāṇaṃ na anumānikaṃ saṃsayābhāvato. Saṃsayānubaddhaṃ hi loke anumānañāṇa’’nti vadanti, tesampi taṃ na yuttaṃ. Sabbassa hi appaccakkhabhāve atthāvisaṃvādanena ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā ‘‘sesepi eva’’nti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanassa asambhavato. Yañhi taṃ sesaṃ, taṃ appaccakkhanti.
那么,难道那(佛智)也是现量,而它的其余部分就不是现量了吗?这些说法全都没有道理。为什么呢?因为那是不可思议的领域。世尊确实说过:“比丘们,佛的境界是不可思议的,不应去思惟。谁若去思惟,就会陷入疯狂和苦恼。”(《增支部》4.77)
在这里,结论是这样的:凡是世尊想要了知的,无论是全部还是一部分,他的智在那些对象上都无障碍地运作,所以是现量;而且因为始终定心,没有散乱。如果他想了知的全部对象都不在他的智的范围内,那他的智就不可能随欲而转;而它必定是随欲而转的,因为经中说:“一切法都随世尊的转向而转,随欲而转,随作意而转,随心生起而转。”对于过去和未来的对象,世尊的智也是现量,因为它不经过推论、圣言量或思择的执取。巴利
Atha tampi paccakkhaṃ, tassa sesabhāvo eva na siyāti? Sabbametaṃ akāraṇaṃ. Kasmā ? Avisayavicāraṇabhāvato. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘buddhavisayo, bhikkhave, acinteyyo na cintetabbo. Yo cinteyya, ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77). Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – yaṃkiñci bhagavatā ñātuṃ icchitaṃ sakalaṃ, ekadeso vā, tattha appaṭihatavuttitāya paccakkhato ñāṇaṃ pavattati, niccasamādhānañca vikkhepābhāvato. Ñātuṃ icchitassa ca sakalassa avisayabhāve tassa ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhavuttitā na siyā, ekanteneva sā icchitabbā ‘‘sabbe dhammā buddhassa bhagavato āvajjanappaṭibaddhā ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhā manasikārappaṭibaddhā cittuppādappaṭibaddhā’’ti vacanato. Atītānāgatavisayampi bhagavato ñāṇaṃ anumānāgamatakkaggahaṇavirahitattā paccakkhameva.
难道说,在这种主张下,当世尊想要了知一切时,他的智就会因为一次性以整个境界为所缘、以未加区分的方式生起,因而无法避免上面所说的过失吗?不是这样,因为那种境界已经被净化了。佛陀的境界已被净化,所以不可思议。否则,如果诸佛世尊的智和凡夫的智运作方式相同,那佛陀的智就不会是不可思议的了。因此,即使是以一切法为所缘,那智也像以单一法为所缘一样,是在那些法已被善加确定的情况下生起的——这就是此处所说的不可思议。正如经中所说:“所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少。智以所知为尽头,所知以智为尽头。”同样,正自觉者因为以总括、分别、一时或次第的方式,随自己的意愿正确而亲自地觉悟了一切法,所以是正自觉者。巴利
Nanu ca etasmiṃ pakkhe yadā sakalaṃ ñātuṃ icchitaṃ, tadā sakiṃyeva sakalavisayatāya anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ pavatteyyāti vuttadosānātivattiyevāti? Na, tassa visodhitattā. Visodhito hi so buddhavisayo acinteyyoti. Aññathā pacurajanañāṇasamānavuttitāya buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ ñāṇassa acinteyyatā na siyā. Tasmā sakaladhammārammaṇampi taṃ ekadhammārammaṇaṃ viya suvavatthāpiteyeva te dhamme katvā pavattatīti idamettha acinteyyaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ. Ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyya’’nti (mahāni. 69; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5). Evamekajjhaṃ, visuṃ, sakiṃ, kamena vā icchānurūpaṃ sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho.
133 关于“明”:在这里,“明”的意思是了知、如实照见。或者,从刺破对立面的角度说为“明”,也就是破除黑暗蕴等的意思。正因如此,从令自己的所缘被了知的角度说,也是“明”。“具足”就是具有、圆满、无缺的意思。应当知道,经中在各处提到三明和八明,是随顺应度者的意乐而说的。七种正法,就是信、惭、愧、多闻、精进、念和慧。针对这些,经中说:“在此,比丘有信……”等(增支部 10.11)。四禅,就是任何四种色界禅那。巴利
133.Vijjāhīti ettha vindiyaṃ vindatīti vijjā, yāthāvato upalabbhatīti attho. Attano vā paṭipakkhassa vijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, tamokkhandhādikassa padālanaṭṭhenāti attho. Tato eva attano visayassa viditakaraṇaṭṭhenapi vijjā. Sampannattāti samannāgatattā, paripuṇṇattā vā, avikalattāti attho. Tissannaṃ, aṭṭhannaṃ ca vijjānaṃ tattha tattha sutte gahaṇaṃ vineyyajjhāsayavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Satta saddhammā nāma saddhā hirī ottappaṃ bāhusaccaṃ vīriyaṃ sati paññā ca. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘idha bhikkhu saddho hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 10.11). Cattāri jhānānīti yāni kānici cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni.
那么,为什么这里只说戒等十五法就是“行”呢?针对这个质问,说了“正是这些……”等话。这是说明:因为它们被三学所包含,所以对于趣向涅槃来说,确实是决定性的条件。现在,为了证明这个道理,引用经教说“如说……”等。“世尊”等话,是对前面所说内容的总结。巴利
Kasmā panettha sīlādayo pannaraseva ‘‘caraṇa’’nti vuttāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘imeyeva hī’’tiādi . Tena tesaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahato nibbānupagamane ekaṃsato sādhanabhāvamāha. Idāni tadatthasādhanāya āgamaṃ dassento ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādimāha. Bhagavātiādi vuttassevatthassa nigamanavasena vuttaṃ.
难道这种明行具足在声闻弟子身上也能得到吗?虽然能得到,但并不是像世尊那样。为了说明这一点,才说了“其中,明具足……”等话。因为悲梵住属于行法的范畴,而它在这里已经达到了广大境的层次,是共通之法,所以说“行具足圆满大悲而住”。就像要让众生避开无益、致力于有益,没有智慧是做不到的;同样,要了知众生的益与损,没有导师的悲心也是做不到的。因此,这两者在两种情形下各自都有其作用。至于在什么地方哪一种起主导作用,为了说明这一点,才说了“他由于一切知性……”等话。这里的“如同那明行具足者”,意思是:就像其他明行具足的人一样,由此说明这正是明行具足者独有的行持。而为了表明,导师这种明行具足——由于教法具有出离导向——正是声闻弟子们正确修行的唯一根本原因,所以说“他的……”等话。这很容易理解。巴利
Nanu cāyaṃ vijjācaraṇasampadā sāvakesupi labbhatīti? Kiñcāpi labbhati, na pana tathā, yathā bhagavatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha vijjāsampadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Caraṇadhammapariyāpannattā karuṇābrahmavihārassa, so cettha mahaggatabhāvappattā sādhāraṇabhāvoti āha ‘‘caraṇasampadā mahākāruṇikataṃ pūretvā ṭhitā’’ti. Yathā sattānaṃ anatthaṃ parivajjetvā atthe niyojanaṃ paññāya vinā na hoti, evaṃ nesaṃ atthānatthajānanaṃ satthu karuṇāya vinā na hotīti ubhayampi ubhayattha sakiccakameva siyā. Yattha pana yassā padhānabhāvo, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so sabbaññutāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā taṃ vijjācaraṇasampannoti yathā aññopi vijjācaraṇasampanno, tena vijjācaraṇasampannassevāyaṃ āveṇikā paṭipattīti dasseti. Sā panāyaṃ satthu vijjācaraṇasampadā sāsanassa niyyānikatāya sāvakānaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā ekantakāraṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tenassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyameva.
在这里,通过明具足,显示了导师智慧的广大;通过行具足,显示了悲悯的广大。在这两者当中,世尊依智慧而成就法王之位,依悲悯而分享正法。依智慧而对轮回之苦生起厌离,依悲悯而能忍受轮回之苦。依智慧而遍知他人的苦,依悲悯而着手解除他人的苦。依智慧而面向般涅槃,依悲悯而证得般涅槃。依智慧而自己渡越,依悲悯而渡越他人。依智慧而成就佛果,依悲悯而成就佛的事业。或者说,依悲悯而在菩萨阶段面向轮回,依智慧而对轮回不喜乐。同样,依悲悯而不伤害他人,依智慧而自己不畏他人。依悲悯而保护他人时也保护自己,依智慧而保护自己时也保护他人。同样,依悲悯而不折磨他人,依智慧而不折磨自己。由此,在为自利而行等四种人当中,成就了第四种人的身份。同样,依悲悯而成为世间的依怙,依智慧而成为自己的依怙。依悲悯而有谦下之态,依智慧而无高慢之态。同样,他对一切众生所生起的摄受,因为伴随智慧,所以并非于一切处心都离染;依智慧而于一切法心离染,因为伴随悲悯,所以并非不转向摄受一切众生。正如世尊的悲悯远离爱著与忧恼,智慧也远离我想与我所想,应当了知:这些由明行具足所彰显的、相互净化、极其清净的殊胜功德。巴利
Ettha ca vijjāsampadāya satthu paññāmahattaṃ pakāsitaṃ hoti, caraṇasampadāya karuṇāmahattaṃ. Tesu paññāya bhagavato dhammarajjappatti, karuṇāya dhammasaṃvibhāgo. Paññāya saṃsāradukkhanibbidā, karuṇāya saṃsāradukkhasahanaṃ. Paññāya paradukkhaparijānanaṃ, karuṇāya paradukkhapatikārārambho. Paññāya parinibbānābhimukhabhāvo, karuṇāya tadadhigamo. Paññāya sayaṃ taraṇaṃ, karuṇāya paresaṃ tāraṇaṃ. Paññāya buddhabhāvasiddhi, karuṇāya buddhakiccasiddhi. Karuṇāya vā bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ saṃsārābhimukhabhāvo, paññāya tattha anabhirati. Tathā karuṇāya paresaṃ abhiṃsāpanaṃ , paññāya sayaṃ parehi abhāyanaṃ. Karuṇāya paraṃ rakkhanto attānaṃ rakkhati, paññāya attānaṃ rakkhanto paraṃ rakkhati. Tathā karuṇāya aparantapo, paññāya anattantapo. Tena attahitāya paṭipannādīsu catūsu puggalesu catutthapuggalabhāvo siddho hoti. Tathā karuṇāya lokanāthatā, paññāya attanāthatā. Karuṇāya cassa ninnatābhāvo, paññāya unnamābhāvo. Tathā karuṇāya sabbasattesu janitānuggaho paññānugatattā na ca na sabbattha virattacitto, paññāya sabbadhammesu virattacitto karuṇānugatattā na ca na sabbasattānuggahāya pavatto. Yathā hi karuṇā bhagavato sinehasokavirahitā, evaṃ paññā ahaṃkāramamaṃkāravinimuttāti aññamaññavisodhitā paramavisuddhā guṇavisesā vijjācaraṇasampadāhi pakāsitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
134 行也被称为去,比如在“已去、站立”这类说法里。美好的,就是善的。善的状态来自清净,清净来自断除过失,所以说“清净无过”。而所谓的行有很多种,为了指出这里指的是哪种行,就说“圣道”。因为它作为涅槃的去处和证得,所以也被称为“已去”“行”。现在为了说明取这个意思的理由,说了“因此,这个……”等。安稳之处,就是涅槃。无滞著:因为没有障碍,即使在善趣的行进中也不滞著、不形成执著,更何况在其他地方。或者,由于在一座之上就依速疾神通获得了四道,所以无滞著、无挂碍地去了。那种在行走时能去除一切无益、带来一切无上成就的行,才叫美好。而世尊以此而行,所以说“如此,由于美好地行,故为善逝”,这是把“善”字理解为美好的意思。巴利
134.Gamanampi hi gatanti vuccati ‘‘gate ṭhite’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.214; 2.376). Sobhananti subhaṃ. Subhabhāvo visuddhatāya, visuddhatā dosavigamenāti āha ‘‘parisuddhamanavajja’’nti. Gamanañca nāma bahuvidhanti idhādhippetaṃ gamanaṃ dassento ‘‘ariyamaggo’’ti āha. So hi nibbānassa gati adhigamoti katvā ‘‘gataṃ, gamana’’nti ca vuccati. Idāni tasseva gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tena hesā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Khemaṃ disanti nibbānaṃ. Asajjamānoti paripanthābhāvena sugatigamanepi asajjanto saṅgaṃ akaronto, pageva itarattha. Atha vā ekāsane nisīditvā khippabhiññāvaseneva catunnampi maggānaṃ paṭiladdhabhāvato asajjamāno asajjanto gato. Yaṃ gamanaṃ gacchanto sabbamanatthaṃ apaharati, sabbañca anuttaraṃ sampattiṃ āvahati, tadeva sobhanaṃ nāma. Tena ca bhagavā gatoti āha ‘‘iti sobhanagamanattā sugato’’ti sobhanattho su-saddoti katvā.
因为那些丑陋的、苦的、诸行相续的状态已不存在,所以是毕竟之乐,从究竟意义上说,无为界才叫作美好,因此说“他已到达那美好之处,即不死、涅槃”。所以世尊说:“涅槃是至高之乐。”(中部2.215;法句203-204)“正”就是善妙。而善妙的行走,就是不被对立面所制伏的行走,所以说“已断烦恼,不再回返”。这是达到顶点的正行,而成就这种正行的来行之道,本身也是正行。为了显示世尊在这个意义上也是善逝,所以说了“或已正行”等话。以正行道,就是为了证得正等觉的无颠倒行道。“唯作一切世间的利益安乐”,由此显示大菩提道,总的来说,是以恒时带来一切众生利益安乐的方式而运作。“不趋近常见、断见这两个极端而行”,由此显示缘起之行道。“不趋近欲乐、自我折磨这两个极端而行”,由此显示圣道之行道。巴利
Asundarānaṃ dukkhānaṃ saṅkhārappavattīnaṃ abhāvato accantasukhattā ekantato sundaraṃ nāma asaṅkhatā dhātūti āha ‘‘sundarañcesa ṭhānaṃ gato amataṃ nibbāna’’nti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukha’’nti (ma. ni. 2.215; dha. pa. 203-204). Sammāti suṭṭhu. Suṭṭhu gamanañca nāma paṭipakkhena anabhibhūtassa gamananti āha ‘‘pahīne kilese puna apaccāgacchanto’’ti. Idañca sikhāppattaṃ sammāgamanaṃ, yāya āgamanīyapaṭipadāya siddhaṃ, sāpi sammāgamanamevāti evampi bhagavā sugatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘sammā vā gato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sammāpaṭipattiyāti sammāsambodhiyā sampāpane aviparītapaṭipattiyā. ‘‘Sabbalokassa hitasukhameva karonto’’ti etena mahābodhiyā paṭipadā avibhāgena sabbasattānaṃ sabbadā hitasukhāvahabhāveneva pavattatīti dasseti. ‘‘Sassataṃ ucchedanti ime ante anupagacchanto gato’’ti etena paṭiccasamuppādagatiṃ dasseti. ‘‘Kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathanti ime anupagacchanto gato’’ti etena ariyamaggagatiṃ dasseti.
这里“在此处”是指:在合适的场合,只应说合适的话,这话应当能够成立、能够达成。所谓“不实”,就是不真实的内容。因为言语究竟是不实还是真实,是以内容为关键的。“不真”只是“不实”的另一种说法。或者,“不实”是指不存在、没有的东西;“不真”是指并非那样,却以别的方式存在。“无义相应”是指与现世或来世的无益相应,会带来无益。“非义”就是无义,是义的敌对者,也是义的不存在;与它相应,就是离间语和杂秽语。应当知道,这里包含了四种语恶行。其中,第一种语,应理解为对持戒的人说“你是破戒者”,对不是旃陀罗等的人说“你是旃陀罗”之类。第二种语,是对破戒的人以不合律制的方式说“你是破戒者”,对旃陀罗等的人说“你是旃陀罗”之类。第三种语,是说明地狱众生等之所以为地狱众生等的话,比如“提婆达多是堕恶趣者、是地狱众生”之类(律藏·小品348)。第四种语,是迷惑世间的言论,比如“依照吠陀所制定的祭祀仪规而行杀生等,能带来善趣”。第五种语,是以真实之事进行离间等的话。第六种语,应知是在适当、合宜的场合所说的布施、持戒等话。如此,因为善妙地说,也就是避开上面所说的不实等,而说真实、真确、与义相应、可爱、可意的话,因此是善妙地说,所以称为善逝,这是把da音变成ta音。即使只是入耳,世尊的任何话,即使对某人来说并不可爱,也因能成就义利、带来世间的利益安乐,而成为可爱、可意。巴利
Tatrāti yuttaṭṭhāne yuttasseva bhāsane nipphādetabbe, sādhetabbe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Abhūtanti abhūtatthaṃ. Atthamukhena hi vācāya abhūtatā, bhūtatā vā. Atacchanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Abhūtanti vā asantaṃ avijjamānaṃ. Atacchanti atathākāraṃ aññathāsantaṃ. Anatthasañhitanti diṭṭhadhammikena, samparāyikena vā anatthena sañhitaṃ, anatthāvahaṃ. Na atthoti anattho, atthassa paṭipakkho, abhāvo ca, tena sañhitaṃ, pisuṇavācaṃ, samphappalāpañcāti attho. Evamettha catubbidhassāpi vacīduccaritassa saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca paṭhamā vācā sīlavantaṃ ‘‘dussīlo’’ti, acaṇḍālādimeva ‘‘caṇḍālo’’tiādinā bhāsamānassa daṭṭhabbā. Dutiyā dussīlaṃ ‘‘dussīlo’’ti, caṇḍālādimeva ‘‘caṇḍālo’’tiādinā avinayena bhāsamānassa. Tatiyā nerayikādikassa nerayikādibhāvavibhāvanīkathā yathā ‘‘āpāyiko devadatto nerayiko’’tiādikā (cūḷava. 348). Catutthī ‘‘vedavihitena yaññavidhinā pāṇātipātādikataṃ sugatiṃ āvahatī’’ti lokassa byāmohanakathā. Pañcamī bhūtena pesuññūpasaṃhārādikathā. Chaṭṭhā yuttappattaṭṭhāne pavattitā dānasīlādikathā veditabbā. Evaṃ sammā gadattāti yathāvuttaṃ abhūtādiṃ vajjetvā bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasañhitaṃ piyaṃ manāpaṃ tato eva sammā suṭṭhu gadanato sugato da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā. Āpāthagamanamattena kassaci appiyampi hi bhagavato vacanaṃ piyaṃ manāpameva atthasiddhiyā lokassa hitasukhāvahattā.
另外,他的行走是美好的,所以叫善逝。因为世尊走向应当受调伏的众生,完全是为了给他们带来利益和安乐,所以是美好的、吉祥的。同样,他的身行,因为身体具足相与随好而庄严,远离了急促、迟缓、踉跄、拖拽、挤压、蜷缩、弯曲、杂乱等过失,像王鹅、公牛、象王、兽王那样优雅地行走,所以是美好的;他的智行,具备广大、清净、悲、念、精进等种种殊胜功德,从发愿直到大菩提,因为没有过失,又能给众生带来利益和安乐,所以也是美好的。或者,他以自证之智,通过遍知现观而遍知整个世间,已经正确地行去、已经通达,所以叫善逝。同样,他通过断现观而断除世间的集起,使其达到不再生起的法性,已经正确地行去、已经超越,所以叫善逝。他通过证现观而证得世间灭,也就是涅槃,已经正确地行去、已经证得,所以叫善逝。他通过修现观而正确地行于通向世间灭的道路,已经正确地行去、已经行道,所以叫善逝。同样,对这个包括天界在内的世间,无论是所见、所闻、所觉、所识、所得、所寻求、以心所随寻的一切,他都像掌中的庵摩罗果一样,以现量正确地行去、完全了知,所以叫善逝。巴利
Apica sobhanaṃ gataṃ gamanaṃ etassāti sugato. Bhagavato hi veneyyajanupasaṅkamanaṃ ekantena tesaṃ hitasukhanipphādanato sobhanaṃ bhaddakaṃ . Tathā lakkhaṇānubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāya dutavilambitakhalitānukaḍḍhananippīḷanukkuṭikakuṭilākulatādidosarahitavilāsitarājahaṃsavasabhavāraṇamigarājagamanaṃ kāyagamanaṃ, ñāṇagamanañca vipulanimmalakaruṇāsativīriyādiguṇavisesasahitaṃ abhinīhārato yāva mahābodhi anavajjatāya, sattānaṃ hitasukhāvahatāya ca sobhanameva. Atha vā sayambhūñāṇena sakalampi lokaṃ pariññābhisamayavasena parijānanto sammā gato avagatoti sugato. Tathā lokasamudayaṃ pahānābhisamayavasena pajahanto anuppattidhammataṃ āpādento sammā gato atītoti sugato. Lokanirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena sammā gato adhigatoti sugato. Lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ bhāvanābhisamayavasena sammā gato paṭipannoti sugato. Tathā yaṃ imassa sadevakassa lokassa diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, sabbaṃ taṃ hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya sammā paccakkhato gato abbhaññāsīti sugato.
135 “以一切方式”,就是以所有方式。无论哪个世间,应当以什么方式了知,就以那种方式了知。为了说明这些方式,所以说了“从自性上”等。其中,“从自性上”,就是从苦的自性上。因为一切世间都以苦为自性。正如所说:“简要地说,五取蕴就是苦。”“从集上”,就是从世间由此集起的地方,也就是从渴爱等。“从灭上”,就是从世间在这里灭尽的地方,也就是从离行。“从灭之道上”,就是通过这种方法应当证得灭,也就是从圣道,因为除了这个之外,没有别的方式。巴利
135.Sabbathāti sabbappakārena. Yo yo loko yathā yathā veditabbo, tathā tathā. Te pana pakāre dassetuṃ ‘‘sabhāvato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabhāvatoti dukkhasabhāvato. Sabbo hi loko dukkhasabhāvo. Yathāha ‘‘saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti (mahāva. 14; dī. ni. 2.387). Samudayatoti yato so samudeti, tato taṇhādito. Nirodhatoti yattha so nirujjhati, tato visaṅkhārato. Nirodhūpāyatoti yena vidhinā so nirodho pattabbo, tato ariyamaggato, ito aññassa pakārassa abhāvā.
世尊这样说了“以一切方式了知世间”之后,为了显示能达成这个意义的经文,就说了“贤友,在哪里……”等等。在这当中,用“不生”等说法直接否定了生等;又用“不死、不结生”这两个词,否定了前后相续的死与结生。不过有些人说:“‘不生’等是就胎生者而说的,另一个则是就化生者而说的。”那个(taṃ)就是远离生等的意思。“以行走”就是以脚步行走。“应知”就是应当被了知。或者读作“ñātāya”,意思是“这是已知者”,也就是说“这个寻求涅槃的人”。巴利
Iti ‘‘sabbathā lokaṃ avedī’’ti vatvā tadatthasādhakaṃ suttaṃ dassento ‘‘yattha kho āvuso’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘na jāyatī’’tiādinā ujukaṃ jātiādīni paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘na cavati na upapajjatī’’ti padadvayena aparāparaṃ cavanupapajjanāni paṭikkhipati. Keci pana ‘‘na jāyatītiādi gabbhaseyyakavasena vuttaṃ, itaraṃ opapātikavasenā’’ti vadanti. Tanti jātiādirahitaṃ. Gamanenāti padasā gamanena. Ñāteyyanti jānitabbaṃ. ‘‘Ñātāya’’nti vā pāṭho, ñātā ayaṃ nibbānatthikoti adhippāyo.
就算真的靠双脚走过去,也不可能了知、看见或到达世间的尽头。不过,我可以在一个有限、有范围的层面上来施设并说明它——为了说明这一点,他说了“又复……”等话。其中,“有想者”就是指有想伴随的;正因为如此,也就是有命者、有识者。而对于无识者,则不可能在仅由时节所生的色法集合上施设,这就是他的意思。“世间”指蕴等世间。“世间灭”指那个世间的灭尽,或者就是涅槃。因为对某些人来说,涅槃虽然没有方位可得,但依他们证得的角度,从假说上和方位上仍然可以指示,比如“眼在世间中是可爱、可意的,渴爱在这里被断除时就是被断除,在这里被灭尽时就是被灭尽”。巴利
Kāmaṃ pādagamanena gantvā lokassantaṃ ñātuṃ, daṭṭhuṃ, pattuṃ vā na sakkā, apica parimitaparicchinnaṭṭhāne taṃ paññāpetvā dassemīti dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sasaññimhīti saññāsahite. Tato eva samanake saviññāṇake. Aviññāṇake pana utusamuṭṭhānarūpasamudāyamatte paññāpetuṃ na sakkāti adhippāyo. Lokanti khandhādilokaṃ. Lokanirodhanti tassa lokassa nirujjhanaṃ, nibbānameva vā. Adesampi hi taṃ yesaṃ nirodho, tesaṃ vasena upacārato, desatopi niddisīyati yathā ‘‘cakkhuṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.401; ma. ni. 1.134; vibha. 204).
以步行前往,指的是以平常的步行方式。世间尽头,指的是行世间的尽头,也就是作为到达边际之因的涅槃。任何时候,指的是无论何时。未到达,指的是没有通过最上之道证得。解脱,就是解脱、出离。因此,是因为没有到达世间尽头,就没有从轮回之苦中解脱,所以这样说。have只是一个虚词。世间解,是指从自性等方面了知一切世间的人。善慧,是指拥有美好智慧的人。达世间边者,是指以遍知通达了知世间,再以断除通达达到世间边际的人。因为道与梵行的安住已经圆满,所以是已住梵行者。因为一切烦恼都已寂灭,或者因为四圣谛之法已经通达,所以是寂灭者。他不期望、不希求。就像对这个世间一样,对其他世间也是如此,因为不再有结生。巴利
Gamanenāti pākatikagamanena. Lokassantoti saṅkhāralokassa anto antakiriyāhetubhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ. Kudācananti kadācipi. Apatvāti aggamaggena anadhigantvā. Pamocananti pamutti nissaraṇaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā lokassantaṃ apatvā vaṭṭadukkhato mutti natthi, tasmā. Haveti nipātamattaṃ. Lokavidūti sabhāvādito sabbaṃ lokaṃ jānanto. Sumedhoti sundarapañño. Lokantagūti pariññābhisamayena lokaṃ viditvā pahānābhisamayena lokantagū. Maggabrahmacariyavāsassa pariniṭṭhitattā vusitabrahmacariyo. Sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ samitattā, catusaccadhammānaṃ vā abhisamitattā samitāvī. Nāsīsati na pattheti. Yathā imaṃ lokaṃ, evaṃ parañca lokaṃ appaṭisandhikattā.
136 136. 虽然“世间解”这个性质已经通过自性毫无遗漏地显示出来了,因为它是从自性方面显示的,但世间只是部分地被提到,所以为了毫无遗漏地显示它,才说了“再者,有三种世间”等话。其中,与根相连的诸蕴的集合与相续,是有情世间。在色等事物上因为执著、黏着于有情,所以称为有情;在这里,善与不善以及它们的异熟败坏,所以叫世间。与根不相连的色等的集合与相续,是器世间;在这里,有恐惧的与无恐惧的,以及它们所处的空间,败坏,所以称为世间。由于它是它们的依处,所以也称为“器世间”。两者中的诸蕴都是行世间,因为它们被诸缘所造作,坏灭、败坏。依食而住,即依缘而住,意思是依缘而转。这里“食”一词的缘义,如“此食对于未生起的欲贪的生起”等中那样。如此,以“一切有情”一语,无想有情也被包括在内。然而,这依食而住性,从究竟义上说,是行法,不是有情法,所以说“依食而住者,在出现该语的经文处应知为行世间”。巴利
136. Evaṃ yadipi lokavidutā anavasesato dassitā sabhāvato dassitattā, loko pana ekadeseneva vuttoti taṃ anavasesato dassetuṃ ‘‘apica tayo lokā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha indriyabaddhānaṃ khandhānaṃ samūho, santāno ca sattaloko. Rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya satto, lokīyanti ettha kusalākusalaṃ, tabbipāko cāti lokoti. Anindriyabaddhānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ samūho, santāno ca okāsaloko lokiyanti ettha tasā, thāvarā ca, tesañca okāsabhūtoti. Tadādhāratāya hesa ‘‘bhājanaloko’’tipi vuccati. Ubhayepi khandhā saṅkhāraloko paccayehi saṅkharīyanti, lujjanti palujjanti cāti. Āhāraṭṭhitikāti paccayaṭṭhitikā, paccayāyattavuttikāti attho. Paccayattho hettha āhāra-saddo ‘‘ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa uppādāyā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.232) viya. Evaṃ hi ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti iminā asaññasattāpi pariggahitā honti. Sā panāyaṃ āhāraṭṭhitikatā nippariyāyato saṅkhāradhammo, na sattadhammoti āha ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikāti āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhāraloko veditabbo’’ti.
如果是这样,那么“一切有情”这句话怎么成立呢?这是以补特伽罗为立足点的教导,所以没有这个过失。就像在其他地方也说:“比丘们,比丘对一法正确地厌离、正确地离染、正确地解脱、正确地看到尽头、正确地通达意义,就在这一生中成为终结苦的人。是哪一法呢?‘一切有情依食而住。’”(《增支部》10.27)持邪见的人大多数是以常见等方式,把“我、世间”构想为以有情为对象,而不是以行(造作)为对象,所以说:“在说到‘世间是常’或‘世间是无常’的地方,应当知道这是指有情世间。”巴利
Yadi evaṃ ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti idaṃ kathanti? Puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanāti nāyaṃ doso. Yathā aññatthāpi ‘‘ekadhamme, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sammā nibbindamāno sammā virajjamāno sammā vimuccamāno sammā pariyantadassāvī sammadatthaṃ abhisamecca diṭṭheva dhamme dukkhassantakaro hoti. Katamasmiṃ ekadhamme? Sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti (a. ni. 10.27). Diṭṭhigatikānaṃ sassatādivasena ‘‘attā, loko’’ti ca parikappanā yebhuyyena sattavisayā, na saṅkhāravisayāti āha ‘‘sassato lokoti vā asassato lokoti vā āgataṭṭhāne sattaloko veditabbo’’ti.
日月运行所及之处,是指日月旋转、周行的范围。它们照亮各方,放出光明,是说由于日月本身的运行,那些方向就变得明亮,发出光来。如此千重世间,是指同样千种的器世间,也就是一千个世界界。也有人读作“tāva sahassavā”。巴利
Yāvatā candimasūriyā pariharantīti yattake ṭhāne candimasūriyā parivattanti paribbhamanti. Disā bhanti virocamānāti tesaṃ paribbhamaneneva tā disā pabhassarā hutvā virocanti. Tāva sahassadhā lokoti tattakaṃ sahassappakāro okāsaloko, sahassalokadhātuyoti attho. ‘‘Tāva sahassavā’’ti vā pāṭho.
“此亦”指的是这三类世间。因为世尊在一切方面都已了知,所以这里这样关联。“一种世间”:在“一切有情依食而住”这句以补特伽罗为立足点的教导中,说明了诸行都依缘而转;因此,以诸行为体的整个世间就是一种、一类,因为没有别的类别存在。“二种世间”等也应照这个道理来理解。这里用“名”这个词,就没有把涅槃包含进去,因为涅槃不是世间的性质。有人问:在“依食而住”那里,依缘而转的特性难道不也让道果诸法变成世间了吗?不会。因为这里所说的“世间”,是指应被遍知的苦谛诸法。或者,凡是被执取为“不坏灭、不崩解”的,它实际上并非如此,所以它就是世间;因此,不被这种执取所及的出世间法,就没有世间性。作为取著所缘的蕴,就是取蕴。十处,指十种色处。巴利
Tampīti taṃ tividhampi lokaṃ. Tathā hissa sabbathāpi viditoti sambandho. Eko lokoti ‘‘sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti yāya puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya sabbesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ paccayāyattavuttitā vuttā, tāya sabbo saṅkhāraloko eko ekavidho pakārantarassa abhāvato. Dve lokātiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Nāma-ggahaṇena cettha nibbānassa aggahaṇaṃ, tassa alokasabhāvattā. Nanu ca ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti ettha paccayāyattavuttitāya maggaphaladhammānampi lokatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati, pariññeyyānaṃ dukkhasaccadhammānaṃ idha ‘‘loko’’ti adhippetattā. Atha vā ‘‘na lujjati na palujjatī’’ti yo gahito tathā na hoti, so lokoti taṃgahaṇarahitānaṃ lokuttarānaṃ natthi lokatā. Upādānānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā upādānakkhandhā. Dasāyatanānīti dasa rūpāyatanāni.
在这里,“依食而住”这个说法,说的是诸行依赖条件而运转,这就显示了诸行的无常性。而依据这个无常性,从“凡是无常的,就是苦;凡是苦的,就是无我”(《相应部》3.15)这句话来看,苦性和无我性也就被阐明了,因此三种共相都已经被涵盖。“名”指四种非色蕴,从意义上说就是触等心所。“色”指四大种和所造色,从意义上说就是地等元素。这样,从自相来看,诸行已经毫无遗漏地被涵盖。通过涵盖诸行本身,它们之间的种种差别——善、不善等,以及因、果等——也一并被涵盖了。所以说:“如此,这个行世间也已经在一切方面被了知了。”巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti paccayāyattavuttitāvacanena saṅkhārānaṃ aniccatā. Tāya ca ‘‘yadaniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) vacanato dukkhānattatā ca pakāsitā hontīti tīṇipi sāmaññalakkhaṇāni gahitāni. Nāmanti cattāro arūpino khandhā, te ca atthato phassādayo. Rūpanti bhūtupādāyarūpāni, tāni ca atthato pathavīādayoti aviseseneva salakkhaṇato saṅkhārā gahitā. Taggahaṇeneva ye tesaṃ visesā kusalādayo, hetuādayo ca, tepi gahitā eva hontīti āha ‘‘iti ayaṃ saṅkhāralokopi sabbathā vidito’’ti.
心依止于某处而安住,这处所就是心的“栖所”,就像野兽的栖身处一样。譬如野兽出去觅食,回来之后仍然就地躺在丛林深处,那里就是它的栖所;同样,心虽然到处活动,但终究会依止于某处而安住,那里就称为心的“栖所”。这个栖所按常见等见解来分,有四种。经中这样说:巴利
Āgamma cittaṃ seti etthāti āsayo migāsayo viya. Yathā migo gocarāya gantvā paccāgantvā tattheva vanagahane sayatīti so tassa āsayo, evaṃ aññathā pavattitvāpi cittaṃ āgamma yattha seti, so tassa āsayoti vuccati. So pana sassatadiṭṭhiādivasena catubbidho. Vuttañca –
常见与断见,以及随顺忍。
如实之智,这称为意乐。巴利
‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhi ca, khanti cevānulomikā; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaddita’’nti.
在这里,因为一切见都被常见和断见这两种见所涵盖,所以一切执持邪见的有情都依止这两种见。正如经中所说:“迦旃延,这个世间多半依止于二元:存在和不存在。”其中,“存在”指的是执取常见,“不存在”指的是执取断见。以上就是随顺轮回的凡夫的倾向。而随顺还灭的清净众生,则具有随顺忍和如实智这两种倾向。巴利
Tattha sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi saṅgahitattā sabbepi diṭṭhigatikā sattā imā eva dve diṭṭhiyo sannissitā. Yathāha ‘‘dvayanissito khvāyaṃ, kaccāna, loko yebhuyyena atthitañca natthitañcā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.15). Atthitāti hi sassataggāho adhippeto, natthitāti ucchedaggāho. Ayaṃ tāva vaṭṭanissitānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ āsayo. Vivaṭṭanissitānaṃ pana suddhasattānaṃ anulomikā khanti, yathābhūtañāṇanti duvidho āsayo.
能了知众生的四种依止,就是“了知依止”。在了知的时候,即使在他们那些邪见以及智慧没有生起的刹那,他也能了知。正如这样说:巴利
Āsayaṃ jānātīti catubbidhampi sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānāti. Jānanto ca tesaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ, tesañca ñāṇānaṃ appavattikkhaṇepi jānāti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
就算他正在享受欲乐,也能知道:这个人以欲为重,以欲为依止,心倾向于欲;就算他正在享受欲乐,也能知道:这个人以出离为重,以出离为依止,心倾向于出离。巴利
‘‘Kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo kāmagaruko kāmāsayo kāmādhimutto’ti, kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo nekkhammagaruko nekkhammāsayo nekkhammādhimutto’ti’’ādi (paṭi. ma. 1.113).
因为没有被断除,所以它们一直潜伏在众生的心相续中,因此叫“随眠”。意思是说,一旦遇到合适的因缘,它们就会生起。这就说明了:它们在因缘具足时是有可能生起的。因为未被断除的烦恼,只要因缘具足,就会生起。那么,这些随眠具体是哪些呢?就是贪等七种未来的烦恼;过去和现在的烦恼,因为本质相同,也同样被称为随眠。诸法的本质并不会因为时间不同而有所改变。他了知这七种随眠在每一个众生的心相续中,以高低优劣的不同方式持续活动。巴利
Appahīnabhāvena santāne anu anu sayantīti anusayā, anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjantīti attho. Etena nesaṃ kāraṇalābhe uppajjanārahataṃ dasseti. Appahīnā hi kilesā kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjanti. Ke pana te? Rāgādayo satta anāgatā kilesā, atītā, paccuppannā ca taṃsabhāvattā tathā vuccanti. Na hi dhammānaṃ kālabhedena sabhāvabhedo atthi. Taṃ sattavidhaṃ anusayaṃ tassa tassa sattassa santāne paroparabhāvena pavattamānaṃ jānāti.
“行”指的是善行和恶行。这在《分别论》(分别论814、817)讲解“行”的地方已经说明过了。或者,“行”也可以理解为“习性”。这些习性按贪、嗔、痴、信、慧、寻来分,有六种根本习性;它们内部差别无量,而按混合来分,则有六十三种。他从自性、杂染与清净、生起、果报、等流等方面来了知这个行。巴利
Caritanti sucaritaduccaritaṃ. Taṃ hi vibhaṅge (vibha. 814, 817) caritaniddese niddiṭṭhaṃ. Atha vā caritanti cariyā veditabbā. Tā pana rāgadosamohasaddhābuddhivitakkavasena cha mūlacariyā, tāsaṃ apariyanto antarabhedo, saṃsaggabhedo pana tesaṭṭhividho. Taṃ caritaṃ sabhāvato saṃkilesavodānato samuṭṭhānato phalato nissandatoti evamādinā pakārena jānāti.
意乐即意乐的界域。它有两种:低劣的意乐和殊胜的意乐。以此,具有低劣意乐的众生,只亲近具有低劣意乐的人;具有殊胜意乐的众生,也只亲近具有殊胜意乐的人。这个意乐界,以意乐为自性者即是意乐。他了知那种意乐:“这个人的意乐低劣,那个人的意乐殊胜。”在此基础上还能了知:“这个人的意乐钝,那个人的意乐更钝,还有人的意乐最钝”等等。因为就像根有利有钝,应当知道意乐也有相应的利钝等差别。正如《迷惑冰消》(分别论注818, 820)中所说:“尽管意乐在前面已经讲过,这里再次提到,是为了显示众生根的利钝。”巴利
Adhimutti ajjhāsayadhātu. Sā duvidhā hīnādhimutti paṇītādhimuttīti. Yāya hīnādhimuttikā sattā hīnādhimuttikeyeva sevanti, paṇītādhimuttikā ca paṇītādhimuttikeyeva. Sā ajjhāsayadhātu ajjhāsayasabhāvo adhimutti. Taṃ adhimuttiṃ jānāti ‘‘imassa adhimutti hīnā, imassa paṇītā’’ti, tatthāpi ‘‘imassa mudu, imassa mudutarā, imassa mudutamā’’tiādinā. Indriyānaṃ hi tikkhamudubhāvādinā yathārahaṃ adhimuttiyā tikkhamudubhāvādiko veditabbo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sammohavinodanīyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 818, 820) ‘‘heṭṭhā gahitāpi adhimutti idha sattānaṃ tikkhindriyamudindriyabhāvadassanatthaṃ puna gahitā’’ti.
“少尘垢”是指这些众生的眼睛尘垢很少,所以叫“少尘垢”;也可以说,他们在智慧之眼中的尘垢很少,所以叫“少尘垢”。那些只有随眠状态的贪等尘垢的众生,就是“少尘垢者”。至于“多尘垢”,这里也可以用同样的方式来理解:贪等尘垢增盛的众生,就是“多尘垢者”。巴利
Apparajaṃ akkhaṃ etesanti apparajakkhā, appaṃ vā rajaṃ paññāmaye akkhimhi etesanti apparajakkhā, anussadarāgādirajā sattā, te apparajakkhe. Mahārajakkheti etthāpi eseva nayo. Ussadarāgādirajā mahārajakkhā.
“利根”是指信等诸根锐利的人。“钝根”是指信等诸根迟钝的人。这里所说的,是“依止根”。“善行相”是指行相美好、本性良善,意思是心倾向于出离。“易教化”是指容易让他领悟正性决定,也就是有信心、有智慧的人。“堪能”和“不堪能”中,“堪能”是指远离业障、烦恼障、异熟障的人。与上面所说的相反,就应当知道是“恶行相”“难教化”“不堪能”。在这里,对于“尘少”的人,应当知道是以“这个人的贪尘少,这个人的嗔尘少”等等方式来了解的。其余各项也是同样的道理。因此,因为世尊对无量众生的依止等毫无遗漏地了知,所以对这位世尊来说,众生世界也是完全被了知的。巴利
Tikkhindriyeti tikhiṇehi saddhādīhi indriyehi samannāgate. Mudindriyeti mudukehi saddhādīhi indriyehi samannāgate. Upanissayaindriyāni nāma idhādhippetāni. Svākāreti sundarākāre kalyāṇapakatike, vivaṭṭajjhāsayeti attho. Suviññāpayeti sammattaniyāmaṃ viññāpetuṃ sukare saddhe, paññavante ca. Bhabbe abhabbeti ettha bhabbeti kammāvaraṇakilesāvaraṇavipākāvaraṇarahite. Vuttavipariyāyena dvākāraduviññāpayābhabbā veditabbā. Ettha ca ‘‘imassa rāgarajo appo, imassa dosarajo appo’’tiādinā apparajakkhesu jānanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Tasmāti yasmā bhagavā aparimāṇe satte āsayādito anavasesetvā jānāti, tasmā assa bhagavato sattalokopi sabbathā vidito.
难道不也应该了知众生的根器量等吗?确实应该。不过,了知这些并不能导向厌离、离欲、灭尽,所以这里没有采纳。但世尊对它们同样完全了知、完全确定,只是因为没有必要,才没有纳入教说。因此说:巴利
Nanu ca sattesu pamāṇādipi jānitabbo atthīti? Atthi. Tassa pana jānanaṃ na nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāyāti idha na gahitaṃ, bhagavato pana tampi suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitameva, payojanābhāvā desanaṃ nāruḷhaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –
那时,世尊用指甲尖挑起一点尘土,对比丘们说:“比丘们,你们怎么想?是我指甲尖上挑起的这一点尘土多,还是这大地多?”等等。巴利
‘‘Atha kho bhagavā parittaṃ nakhasikhāyaṃ paṃsuṃ āropetvā bhikkhū āmantesi ‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, katamaṃ nu kho bahutaraṃ – yo vāyaṃ mayā paritto nakhasikhāyaṃ paṃsu āropito, ayaṃ vā mahāpathavī’’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.1121).
137 器世间也完全了知,这是连接关系。轮围,就是世界界。因为它被像轮缘一样的轮围山从四周环绕,所以称为轮围。三十四个百,就是四个超过的三十个百,意思是三千与四百。三百五十,就是三个半百,意思是三百五十。那由他,就是一万。已说,就是已经说明了。安立,就是从下方、上方等一切处的安立。巴利
137. Okāsalokopi sabbathā viditoti sambandho. Cakkavāḷanti lokadhātu. Sā hi nemimaṇḍalasadisena cakkavāḷapabbatena samantato parikkhittattā ‘‘cakkavāḷa’’nti vuccati. Catutiṃsasatāni cāti catuadhikāni tiṃsasatāni, tīṇisahassāni, cattārisatāni cāti attho . Aḍḍhuḍḍhānīti upaḍḍhacatutthāni, tīṇisatāni, paññāsañcāti attho. Nahutānīti dasasahassāni. Saṅkhātāti kathitā. Saṇṭhitīti heṭṭhā, uparito cāti sabbaso ṭhiti.
“如此安立”就是“这样安住下来”。“此处”指轮围界中。“极高”就是刚好那么高:它的高度正好是八万四千由旬。而且在这里不只是高度如此,它的长度和宽度也同样正好是这么多。正如所说的——巴利
Evaṃ saṇṭhiteti evamavaṭṭhite. Etthāti cakkavāḷe. Accuggato tāvadevāti tattakameva caturāsīti yojanasahassāniyeva ubbedho . Na kevalaṃ cettha ubbedhova, atha kho āyāmavitthārāpissa tattakāyeva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,须弥山王纵向长八万四千由旬,横向宽八万四千由旬。巴利
‘‘Sineru, bhikkhave, pabbatarājā caturāsīti yojanasahassāni āyāmena, caturāsīti yojanasahassāni vitthārenā’’ti (a. ni. 7.66).
关于“从那里”:须弥山下方和上方,按所说的量。“半半”就是一半又一半。这里说的是:持双山沉入海中四万二千由旬,同样也高出海面四万二千由旬;伊沙陀罗山沉入海中二万一千由旬,同样也高出海面二万一千由旬。按照这个道理,其余诸山也应知道是半半之量。正如大海渐次倾斜至轮围山脚,同样至须弥山脚。下方,须弥量之半的持双山亦稳固立于大地,伊沙陀罗等亦然。这正是所说的:“诸比丘,大海渐次倾斜、渐次低垂、渐次下倾。”(《自说》45;《律藏·小品》384;《增支部》8.19)须弥山与持双山等之间,名为七海。据说它们的宽度依次与须弥山等的高度相等。“婆诃”就是广大。巴利
Tatoti sinerussa heṭṭhā, upari ca vuttappamāṇato. Upaḍḍhupaḍḍhenāti upaḍḍhena upaḍḍhena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – dvācattālīsa yojanasahassāni samudde ajjhogāḷho tattakameva ca upari uggato yugandharapabbato, ekavīsa yojanasahassāni samudde ajjhogāḷho tattakameva ca upari uggato īsadharo pabbatoti iminā nayena sesesupi upaḍḍhupaḍḍhapamāṇatā veditabbā. Yathā mahāsamuddo yāva cakkavāḷapādamūlā anupubbaninno, evaṃ yāva sinerupādamūlāti heṭṭhā sinerupamāṇato upaḍḍhapamāṇopi yugandharapabbato pathaviyaṃ suppatiṭṭhito, evaṃ īsadharādayopīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ ‘‘mahāsamuddo, bhikkhave, anupubbaninno anupubbapoṇo anupubbapabbhāro’’ti (udā. 45; cūḷava. 384; a. ni. 8.19). Sineruyugandharādīnaṃ antare sīdantarasamuddā nāma. Te vitthārato yathākkamaṃ sineruādīnaṃ accuggatasamānaparimāṇāti vadanti. Brahāti mahanto.
“须弥山的周围”,是指以环绕的方式安立在须弥山四周。先是持双山环绕须弥山而住,伊沙陀罗山又环绕持双山而住。就这样,一座座山依次环绕而住,所以说“须弥山的周围”。巴利
Sinerussa samantatoti parikkhipanavasena sinerussa samantato ṭhitā. Sineruṃ tāva parikkhipitvā ṭhito yugandharo, taṃ parikkhipitvā īsadharo. Evaṃ taṃ taṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitā ‘‘sinerussa samantato’’ti vuttā.
雪山高五百由旬,也就是雪山这座山的高度是五百由旬。名为naga:就是用“naga”这个词来称呼的树木名称。树干高五十由旬,枝条向四周伸展五十由旬:从高度说是树干高五十由旬,从四周说则是枝条向四周各伸展五十由旬。正因如此,它的宽度是一百由旬,高度也同样如此。以其威力:就是以它广大、能存续一劫等这样的力量。巴利
Yojanānaṃ satānucco, himavā pañca pabbatoti himavā pabbato pañca yojanānaṃ satāni ucco ubbedho. Nagavhayāti naga-saddena avhātabbā rukkhābhidhānā. Paññāsayojanakkhandhasākhāyāmāti’ ubbedhato paññāsayojanakkhandhāyāmā, ubbedhato, samantato ca paññāsayojanasākhāyāmā ca. Tato eva satayojanavitthiṇṇā, tāvadeva ca uggatā. Yassānubhāvenāti yassā mahantatā kappaṭṭhāyitādippakārena pabhāvena.
金翅鸟的木棉树,立在须弥山的第二层阶地上。巴利
Garuḷānaṃ simbalirukkho sinerussa dutiyaparibhaṇḍe patiṭṭhito.
“Sirīsenā”是在主格意义上使用工具格的说法。“第七”是依照性别变换而说的,意思是“sirīso成为第七”。巴利
Sirīsenāti paccatte karaṇavacanaṃ. Sattamanti liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ, sirīso bhavati sattamoti attho.
在这里,月轮在下面,日轮在上面。因为月轮靠近日轮,它就显得缺少自己的影子。它们在空中运行,彼此相隔一由旬,那高度相当于持双山顶。阿修罗的住处位于须弥山下方,无间地狱位于赡部洲下方。赡部洲的形状像一辆车,西牛货洲的形状像一面镜子,东胜身洲的形状像半个月亮,北俱卢洲的形状像一张座椅。人们说,各洲居民的容貌,以及各附属岛屿居民的容貌,也分别和那些洲的形状一样。“在它们之间”,就是指在那些轮围世界之间。就像三片叶子彼此靠近放置时,中间会留出空隙那样,每三个轮围世界之间,各有一个世界中间地狱。巴利
Tattha caṇḍamaṇḍalaṃ heṭṭhā, sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ upari. Tassa āsannabhāvena candamaṇḍalaṃ attano chāyāya vikalabhāvena upaṭṭhāti. Tāni yojanantarikāni yugandharaggapamāṇe ākāse vicaranti. Asurabhavanaṃ sinerussa heṭṭhā. Avīci jambudīpassa. Jambudīpo sakaṭasaṇṭhāno. Aparagoyānaṃ ādāsasaṇṭhāno. Pubbavideho addhacandasaṇṭhāno. Uttarakuru pīṭhasaṇṭhāno. Taṃtaṃnivāsīnaṃ, taṃtaṃparivāradīpavāsīnañca manussānaṃ mukhampi taṃtaṃsaṇṭhānanti vadanti. Tadantaresūti tesaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antaresu. Tiṇṇaṃ hi pattānaṃ aññamaññaāsannabhāvena ṭhapitānaṃ antarasadise tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antare ekeko lokantaranirayo.
“无量”是指无法计量,别人没办法用“有这么多”来测量它们。世尊以无边的佛智了知:“虚空无边,众生界无边,轮围世界无边。”佛智了知这三种无边,而它自身也是无边,所以能界定它们。因为所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少。智以所知为尽头,所知以智为尽头。因此说“以无边佛智了知”。它的无边性,应当理解为:正是通过通达无边的所知,在其中无碍而行。这里难道不也应该说了知劫的成坏等吗?确实应该说,但那会在后面讲神通的部分提到,所以这里没有取来。巴利
Anantānīti aparimāṇāni, ‘‘ettakānī’’ti aññehi minituṃ asakkuṇeyyāni. Bhagavā anantena buddhañāṇena avedi ‘‘ananto ākāso, ananto sattanikāyo, anantāni cakkavāḷānī’’ti tividhampi anantaṃ buddhañāṇaṃ paricchindati sayampi anantattā. Yāvatakaṃ hi ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ. Ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyyanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anantena buddhañāṇena avedī’’ti. Anantatā cassa anantañeyyapaṭivijjhaneneva veditabbā tattha appaṭihatacārattā. Nanu cettha vivaṭṭādīnampi viditatā vattabbāti? Saccaṃ vattabbaṃ, sā pana parato abhiññākathāyaṃ āgamissatīti idha na gahitā.
138 “自己”这个词是从格形式。与“以功德而自己更为殊胜”相关联。这里用“更”这个词,是为了解释“无上”一词的含义,并不是说存在某个更殊胜的人。因为在这个包括天界在内的世间里,确实没有任何人跟如来相似,更何况相等呢?连相似都没有,更殊胜就更不用说了。“任何人”就是无论哪一个人。“胜伏”:由于具足戒德,依止于惭、愧、慈、悲等殊胜因缘,以及信、念、精进、慧等殊胜条件,从证得以来,即非他人所共有,因已断除习气的敌对法,达到彼岸、最为殊胜的导师戒德。导师的戒德,从证得以来就达到了最高境界——它依止于惭、愧、慈、悲这些殊胜因缘,以及信、念、精进、慧这些殊胜条件,不是其他人所能共有的;由于断除了与习气为敌的法,所以达到了最高境界。世尊以这种戒德,径直胜伏了包括天界在内的世间而运转,而不是被任何人所胜伏,这是其意趣。对于定等功德,也应依照相应情况如此说明。应当知道,戒等这些功德是通于世间与出世间的。而解脱智见则唯是世间法,且仅属于欲界。巴利
138.Attanāti nissakkavacanametaṃ. Guṇehi attanā visiṭṭhatarassāti sambandho. Tara-ggahaṇaṃ cettha ‘‘anuttaro’’ti padassa atthaniddesatāya kataṃ, na visiṭṭhassa kassaci atthitāya. Sadevake hi loke sadisakappopi nāma koci tathāgatassa natthi, kuto sadiso. Visiṭṭhe pana kā kathā. Kassacīti kassacipi. Abhibhavatīti sīlasampadāya upanissayabhūtānaṃ hirottappamettākaruṇānaṃ, visesapaccayānaṃ saddhāsativīriyapaññānañca ukkaṃsappattiyā samudāgamato paṭṭhāya anaññasādhāraṇo savāsanapaṭipakkhassa pahīnattā ukkaṃsapāramippatto satthu sīlaguṇo. Tena bhagavā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ aññadatthu abhibhuyya pavattati, na sayaṃ kenaci abhibhuyyatīti adhippāyo. Evaṃ samādhiguṇādīsupi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Sīlādayo cete lokiyalokuttaramissakā veditabbā. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ pana lokiyaṃ kāmāvacarameva.
如果是这样,他又是怎么胜伏包括诸天在内的整个世间的呢?因为他的威力同样无可比拟。那威力无论在所缘境、生起方式,还是生起的行相上,都更加殊胜。因为它是缘着导师独有的解脱功德而生起的,生起时不是寻伺所能触及的范围,极其深奥、极其微细、极其精妙,又因为敌对法已被彻底断除,所以生起时极为明显、极为广大,而且因为已经完全获得了自在,有分心停留的时间又极其短暂,所以能迅速地生起。巴利
Yadi evaṃ, kathaṃ tena sadevakaṃ lokaṃ abhibhavatīti? Tassāpi ānubhāvato asadisattā. Tampi hi visayato, pavattito, pavatti ākārato ca uttaritarameva. Taṃ hi anaññasādhāraṇaṃ satthu vimuttiguṇaṃ ārabbha pavattati, pavattamānañca atakkāvacaraṃ paramagambhīraṃ saṇhasukhumaṃ savisayaṃ paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ suppahīnattā suṭṭhu pākaṭaṃ vibhūtataraṃ katvā pavattati, sammadeva ca vasībhāvassa pāpitattā, bhavaṅgaparivāsassa ca atiparittakattā lahuṃ lahuṃ pavattatīti.
像这样,先用戒等功德说明世尊没有能超过他的人,现在为了说明连跟他相等的人也没有,就说了“无等”等话。其中,“无等”是说在任何一个时候,都没有人在戒等功德上跟他相等或相近,所以叫“无等”。同样,他跟过去、未来那些无等的诸佛相等,而那些无等者又跟他相等,所以叫“无等等”。在戒等功德上没有可以跟他相比的,所以叫“无比”。剩下两个词也是同样的道理。其中,仅仅作为比喻的,叫“比喻”;相似的比喻,叫“类比”;按一对一并列对照而安立的,应当知道叫“对者”。巴利
Evaṃ sīlādiguṇehi bhagavato uttaritarassa abhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni sadisassāpi abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘asamo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha asamoti ekasmiṃ kāle natthi etassa sīlādiguṇena samā sadisāti asamo. Tathā asamehi atītānāgatabuddhehi samo, asamā vā samā etassāti asamasamo. Sīlādiguṇena natthi etassa paṭimāti appaṭimo. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Tattha upamāmattaṃ paṭimā, sadisūpamā paṭibhāgo, yugaggāhavasena ṭhito paṭipuggalo veditabbo.
然而我确实不见:我以一切眼观看整个世间,就像看掌中的余甘子一样,即使这样观看包括天界在内的众生,我也确实不见有任何人比自己戒更圆满、戒德更圆满。因为这样的人不存在,这就是我的意思。关于《最胜净信经》等经,这里说道——巴利
Na kho panāhaṃ samanupassāmīti mama samantacakkhunā hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya sabbalokaṃ passantopi tattha sadevake…pe… pajāya attanā attato sīlasampannataraṃ sampannatarasīlaṃ kañci puggalaṃ na kho pana passāmi, tādisassa abhāvatoti adhippāyo. Aggappasādasuttādīnīti ettha –
比丘们,无论有多少众生,是无足的、两足的、四足的、多足的,是有色的、无色的,有想的、无想的、非想非非想的,如来都被称为它们当中最上的,也就是阿拉汉、正自觉者。比丘们,凡是净信佛陀的人,就是净信最上者;净信最上者的人,果报也是最上的。巴利
‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā catuppadā vā bahuppadā vā rūpino vā arūpino vā saññino vā asaññino vā nevasaññināsaññino vā, tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyati arahaṃ sammāsambuddho. Ye, bhikkhave, buddhe pasannā, agge te pasannā. Agge kho pana pasannānaṃ aggo vipāko hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; 5.32; 10.15; itivu90) –
这是《最上净信经》。用“等”这个字——巴利
Idaṃ aggappasādasuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena –
从诸天、魔、梵天,以及沙门、婆罗门、天与人的整个世界,如来是征服者,不被征服,独见真实,得大自在,因此被称为“如来”。巴利
‘‘Sadevake…pe… sadevamanussāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.24; dī. ni. 3.188) –
如是等经文句子应当知道。在此,“最初的偈颂”中——巴利
Evamādīni suttapadāni veditabbāni. Ādikā gāthāyoti ettha –
我确实是世间的应供者,我是无上的导师;
我是唯一的正自觉者,我已清凉,已寂灭。
已调御者,是调御者中最上;已寂静者,是寂静者中的仙人。
在让人解脱的人当中,他自己已解脱,是最顶尖的;在帮人渡越的人当中,他自己已度脱,是最殊胜的。
于此世间或他世,
无有胜过佛陀者,亦无与佛相等者。
人们说他已到达应受供养者中的至高,
是求福者、求广大果报者的……巴利
‘‘Ahaṃ hi arahā loke, ahaṃ satthā anuttaro; Ekomhi sammāsambuddho, sītibhūtosmi nibbuto. (mahāva. 11; ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341); ‘‘Danto damayataṃ seṭṭho, santo samayataṃ isi; Mutto mocayataṃ aggo, tiṇṇo tārayataṃ varo. (itivu. 112); ‘‘Nayimasmiṃ loke parasmiṃ vā pana, Buddhena seṭṭho sadiso ca vijjati; Yamāhu dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ aggataṃ gato, Puññatthikānaṃ vipulaphalesina’’nti. (vi. va. 1047; kathā. 799) –
像这样的偈颂应当详细展开来说。巴利
Evamādikā gāthā vitthāretabbā.
139 “调伏”就是令其调顺,意思是使其与身等专注相结合。而这种与身等专注的结合,就是随宜地令其安立在彼分断除等当中,所以说“即所谓引导”。应当被调伏的,就是堪能调伏的。“非人”在这里指不是人的。这里显示出相似性,即仅仅具有人形并不算数,其他同类的如夜叉等才称为“非人”,并不是任何与人不同的都叫非人。正如对畜生类另作列举一样,夜叉等也被单独指出。阿波逻罗是住在雪山的。小腹龙王、大腹龙王是住在龙岛的。火顶、烟顶是住在锡兰岛的。通过去除嗔毒而使他们无毒,因此说“令安立于皈依与戒中”。崛牙等,由“等”字应知道包含了瞿昙目佉、优波离居士等。帝释天王等,由“等”字应知道包含了阿阇迦罗波夜叉、跋迦梵天等。而这里的经文,就是这部《结发经》。已调伏者,以种种调伏的方法,应当随宜广说,因为这是以柔和等方法来说明调伏。巴利
139.Dametīti sameti, kāyasamādīhi yojetīti attho. Taṃ pana kāyasamādīhi yojanaṃ yathārahaṃ tadaṅgavinayādīsu patiṭṭhāpanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘vinetīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Dametuṃ yuttāti damanārahā. Amanussapurisāti ettha na manussāti amanussā. Taṃsadisatā ettha jotīyati, tena manussattamattaṃ natthi, aññaṃ samānanti yakkhādayo ‘‘amanussā’’ti adhippetā, na ye keci manussehi aññe. Tathā hi tiracchānapurisānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ kataṃ, yakkhādayo eva ca niddiṭṭhā. Apalālo himavantavāsī. Cūḷodaramahodarā nāgadīpavāsino. Aggisikhadhūmasikhā sīhaḷadīpavāsino. Nibbisā katā dosavisassa vinodanena. Tenāha ‘‘saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpitā’’ti. Kūṭadantādayoti ādi-saddena ghoṭamukhaupāligahapatiādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sakkadevarājādayoti ādi-saddena ajakalāpayakkhabakabrahmādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Idaṃ cettha suttanti idaṃ kesisuttaṃ. Vinītā vicitrehi vinayanūpāyehīti etasmiṃ atthe vitthāretabbaṃ yathārahaṃ saṇhādīhi upāyehi vinayassa dīpanato.
“清净戒等者的初禅等”这句话,是像“清净戒者的初禅,获得初禅者的第二禅”这样,逐一说明每一层越来越高的差别,这就是它们之间的关联。“入流者等”这里,道理也一样。“即使已调伏者,也仍要调伏”这句话,是因为前面已经说过“一切方式都还没有达到调伏的应调伏之人”,所以才这样说。至于那些调伏的过程还没完成、还没有完全超越应受调伏状态的有情,就是针对他们而说“即使已调伏者,也仍要调伏”。因为他们同样是应调伏之人,所以导师才调伏他们。巴利
Visuddhasīlādīnaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīnīti ‘‘visuddhasīlassa paṭhamajjhānaṃ, paṭhamajjhānalābhino dutiyajjhāna’’ntiādinā tassa tassa uparūpari visesaṃ ācikkhantoti sambandho. Sotāpannādīnanti etthāpi eseva nayo. ‘‘Dantepi dametiyevā’’ti idaṃ pubbe ‘‘sabbena sabbaṃ damathaṃ anupagatā purisadammā’’ti vuttāti katvā vuttaṃ. Ye pana vippakatadammabhāvā sabbathā dametabbataṃ nātivattā, te satte sandhāya ‘‘dantepi dametiyevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tepi hi purisadammā evāti, yato ne satthā dameti.
“义句”是指能表达意义的句子,也就是句子本身。因为意义是靠句子表达出来的,不是只靠名词等单词就能表达。而且,通过“一个词”这种形式,就显示了导师“应调伏之人的御者”这一不共特质。因此说“世尊确实……”等。“八方”指八种等至。它们虽然彼此相关联,却以互不混杂的方式显现,所以叫“方”;或者因为像方向一样,所以叫“方”。“不执著”是指不滞留,因为达到了自在状态,所以无著而行。说“奔驰”,是因为与速行的运作相应。只向一个方向奔驰,意思是身体不转动。然而,被导师调伏的应调伏之人,仅以一种威仪就向八方奔驰。因此说“仅以一跏趺坐而坐”。而“八方”只是举例,因为他们还趣向世间人从未到过的灭尽等至之方,以及不死之方。巴利
Atthapadanti atthābhibyañjakapadaṃ, vākyanti attho. Vākyena hi atthābhibyatti, na nāmādipadamattena. Ekapadabhāvena ca anaññasādhāraṇo satthu purisadammasārathibhāvo dassito hoti. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādi. Aṭṭha disāti aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Tā hi aññamaññasambandhāpi asaṃkiṇṇabhāvena dissanti apadissantīti disā, disā viyāti vā disā. Asajjamānāti na sajjamānā vasībhāvappattiyā nissaṅgacārā. Dhāvanti javanavuttiyogato. Ekaṃyeva disaṃ dhāvati, attano kāyaṃ aparivattentoti adhippāyo. Satthārā pana damitā purisadammā ekiriyāpatheneva aṭṭha disā dhāvanti. Tenāha ‘‘ekapallaṅkeneva nisinnā’’ti. Aṭṭha disāti ca nidassanamattametaṃ, lokiyehi agatapubbaṃ nirodhasamāpattidisaṃ, amatadisañca pakkhandanato.
140 140. 现法是指眼前当下的自身存在;致力于此的,就叫现法者,也就是此世利益。由于业与烦恼而应当转生、应当正确前往的下一世,就是来世,也就是他世;致力于此的,就叫来世者,也就是他世利益。最高、最殊胜的利益是胜义,也就是涅槃。以这些现法利益、来世利益和胜义利益,随应而教。所谓随应,就是随顺适合;在这些利益当中,哪一类众生适合哪一种利益,就依照那种利益来教导。教导就是调伏,就是让众生安立在那种利益当中。与财物一同运作的,叫商队,也就是带着货物和本钱到别处经商的人群。以利益教诫等方式应当被保护、应当被教导,他拥有这商队人群,所以叫导师,也就是商队主。世尊就像商队主一样,因此说如商队主故称导师,世尊就是商队主。巴利
140. Diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkho attabhāvo, tattha niyuttoti diṭṭhadhammiko, idhalokattho . Kammakilesavasena samparetabbato sammā gantabbato samparāyo, paraloko, tattha niyuttoti samparāyiko, paralokattho. Paramo uttamo attho paramattho, nibbānaṃ. Tehi diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi. Yathārahanti yathānurūpaṃ. Tesu atthesu yo yo puggalo yaṃ yaṃ arahati, tadanurūpaṃ. Anusāsatīti vineti tasmiṃ atthe patiṭṭhapeti, saha atthena vattatīti sattho, bhaṇḍamūlena vāṇijjāya desantaraṃ gacchanto janasamūho. Hitupadesādivasena paripāletabbo sāsitabbo so etassa atthīti satthā, satthavāho. So viya bhagavāti āha ‘‘satthā viyāti satthā, bhagavā satthavāho’’ti.
现在为了用《义释》巴利的方式说明这个意思,就说了“如同商队主”等话。其中,“商队”指商队里的人。“在此渡越何物故名险路”,也就是没有水的荒野地带;不过按照习惯用法,别的荒野地带也这样叫。“盗贼险路”就是盗贼盘踞的险路,猛兽险路也是这样。“饥馑险路”就是很难得到食物的险路。“渡越”就是越过不安全的地方。“令渡出”等说法,是加上前缀把词义扩展后说的。或者也可以说,“令渡出”是把人引导到安稳之地而渡。“令越出”就是从不安稳之地使人出来而渡。“令完全渡过”就是摄受而渡,也就是像用手摄受而渡的意思。这一切都只是把(众生)安立在渡越、令渡越等安稳之地,因此说“令到达安稳之地”。“众生”指应被调伏的众生。由于是大密林,由于有大过患,由于难以越过,生本身就是险路,即“生之险路”,那生之险路。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ niddesapāḷinayena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā satthavāho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sattheti satthike jane. Kaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāro, nirudako araññappadeso. Ruḷhīvasena pana itaropi araññappadeso tathā vuccati. Corakantāranti corehi adhiṭṭhitakantāraṃ. Tathā vāḷakantāraṃ. Dubbhikkhakantāranti dullabhabhikkhaṃ kantāraṃ. Tāretīti akhemantaṭṭhānaṃ atikkāmeti. Uttāretītiādi upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vuttaṃ. Atha vā uttāretīti khemantabhūmiṃ upanento tāreti. Nittāretīti akhemantaṭṭhānato nikkhāmento tāreti. Patāretīti pariggahetvā tāreti, hatthena pariggahetvā viya tāretīti attho. Sabbampetaṃ tāraṇuttāraṇādikhemaṭṭhāne ṭhapanamevāti āha ‘‘khemantabhūmiṃ sampāpetī’’ti. Satteti veneyyasatte. Mahāgahanatāya, mahānatthatāya, dunnittharaṇatāya ca jātiyeva kantāro jātikantāro, taṃ jātikantāraṃ.
“以最胜的区分来说”,就是按最胜众生的区分来说。因为只有天与人是最胜众生,畜生等不算。“以堪能者的区分来说”,就是按能进入正定聚的有情来划分。“此”指的是“天与人”这句话。“从世尊”是离格用法,就像说“从亲教师学习”,或者理解为从世尊的近处。“具足亲依止缘”,指三因结生等,是证得道果的强大因缘。巴利
Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasenāti ukkaṭṭhasattaparicchedavasena. Devamanussā eva hi ukkaṭṭhasattā, na tiracchānādayo. Bhabbapuggalaparicchedavasenāti sammattaniyāmokkamanassa yogyapuggalassa paricchindanavasena. Etanti ‘‘devamanussāna’’nti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Bhagavatoti nissakkavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘upajjhāyato ajjhetī’’ti, bhagavato santiketi vā attho. Upanissayasampattinti tihetukapaṭisandhiādikaṃ maggaphalādhigamassa balavakāraṇaṃ.
“迦伽拉”是名叫迦伽拉的国王的王后,也或因她建造了这座池,所以得到了“迦伽拉”这个名字。他在声音上取相,心里想着“这被称为法”,凭着法的想,在声音上取相;取相时,他满怀净信,躺在会众的边缘。他站着压住那根杖,是因为没有看见杖已经被放在青蛙头上,于是就在那里把杖压住站着。青蛙也是在杖被放下、被压住的时候,凭着对法生起的净信,一声不响地死了。投生到天界的众生有这样一种法性:他们会转向思惟“我从哪里生到这里?我在那里做了什么业?”所以,当他看见自己的前生时,就说:“啊,原来我也生在这里。”他以感恩所增长的敬爱、恭敬和尊重,顶礼世尊的双足。巴利
Gaggarāyāti gaggarāya nāma rañño deviyā, tāya vā kāritattā ‘‘gaggarā’’ti laddhanāmāya. Sare nimittaṃ aggahesīti ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti dhammasaññāya sare nimittaṃ gaṇhi, gaṇhanto ca pasannacitto parisapariyante nipajji. Sannirumbhitvā aṭṭhāsīti tassa sīse daṇḍassa ṭhapitabhāvaṃ apassanto tattha daṇḍaṃ uppīḷetvā aṭṭhāsi. Maṇḍūkopi daṇḍe ṭhapitepi uppīḷitepi dhammagatena pasādena vissaramakarontova kālamakāsi. Devaloke nibbattasattānaṃ ayaṃ dhammatā, yā ‘‘kutohaṃ idha nibbatto, tattha kiṃ nu kho kammamakāsi’’nti āvajjanā. Tasmā attano purimabhavassa diṭṭhattā āha ‘‘are ahampi nāma idhanibbatto’’ti . Bhagavato pāde vandi kataññutāsaṃvaḍḍhitena pemagāravabahumānena.
世尊虽然早已知道大众的业果,但为了让人们亲眼看见业果和佛陀的威力,就以偈颂问道:“谁在礼敬我?”这里“谁”是指天、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等当中的哪一位,也就是“何人”的意思。“我”指我的。“足”就是双足。“以神通”指以这种天界神通。“以名声”指以这样的随从和规模。“照耀”指闪闪发光。“以殊胜”指极其可爱、令人欢喜、美好的。“色”指肤色,也就是身体的色泽。“普照一切方”是说照亮所有十个方向,就像月亮、像太阳一样,化作一片光明、一片亮光,这就是它的意思。巴利
Bhagavā jānantova mahājanassa kammaphalaṃ, buddhānubhāvañca paccakkhaṃ kātukāmo ‘‘ko me vandatī’’ti gāthāya pucchi. Tattha koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu ko, katamoti attho. Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde. Iddhiyāti imāya evarūpāya deviddhiyā. ‘‘Yasasā’’ti iminā edisena parivārena, paricchedena ca. Jalanti vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kamanīyena sundarena. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya. Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti sabbā dasapi disā pabhāsento, cando viya, sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karontoti attho.
世尊这样一问,天子就表明自己的身份,说出偈颂:“我前世曾是一只青蛙。”其中“前世”指过去生。“在水中”是显示自己当时出生的地方。说“在水中是青蛙”,就排除了旱地蛙之类。牛在那里走动,所以叫“行境”,也就是牛找食物的地方。这里说“像行境一样”,所以是“行境”;水是它的行境,所以叫“水行境”。因为也有像龟等一些水生动物并不是以水为行境,所以特别标明“水行境”。“听您说法”是指在您用梵音、像杜鹃鸟鸣一样美妙的声音说法时,以“这就是法”的方式,取声音的相而听。这里的属格是表示不敬。“牧牛童杀了我”是说,看护牛犊的牧童来到我身边,拄着杖站着,把杖压在我头上,把我弄死了,这就是它的意思。巴利
Evaṃ pana bhagavatā pucchito devaputto attānaṃ pavedento ‘‘maṇḍūkohaṃ pure āsi’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha pureti purimajātiyaṃ. ‘‘Udake’’ti idaṃ tadā attano uppattiṭṭhānadassanaṃ. ‘‘Udake maṇḍūko’’ti etena uddhamāyikādikassa thale maṇḍūkassa nivattanaṃ kataṃ hoti. Gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gunnaṃ ghāsesanaṭṭhānaṃ. Idha pana gocaro viyāti gocaro, vāri udakaṃ gocaro etassāti vārigocaro. Udakacārīpi hi koci kacchapādi avārigocaropi hotīti ‘‘vārigocaro’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Tava dhammaṃ suṇantassāti brahmassarena karavīkarutamañjunā desentassa tava dhammaṃ ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti sare nimittaggāhavasena suṇantassa. Anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Avadhi vacchapālakoti vacche rakkhanto gopāladārako mama samīpaṃ āgantvā daṇḍamolubbha tiṭṭhanto mama sīse daṇḍaṃ sannirumbhitvā maṃ māresīti attho.
他生起喜悦和满意,心想:“以这样微小的福德之力,竟也能获得如此极其宏大的世间和出世间的成就。”于是,他以比之前更加明亮、洁白、闪耀的可见光芒,越发照亮那个地方,露出了微笑。因为他正是由于喜悦和满意——巴利
Sitaṃ katvāti ‘‘tathā parittatarenāpi puññānubhāvena evaṃ ativiya uḷārā lokiyalokuttarā sampattiyo labbhantī’’ti pītisomanassajāto bhāsurataradhavalavipphurantadassanakiraṇāvalīhi bhiyyoso mattāya taṃ padesaṃ obhāsento sitaṃ katvā. Pītisomanassavasena hi so –
请看,我片刻间心清净所得到的神通和名声。
请看我的神通威力,也看看我的容貌和光芒。
乔达摩啊,那些长久以来听闻你法的人,
他们已到达不动之境,到了那里就不会再忧愁。巴利
‘‘Muhuttaṃ cittapasādassa, iddhiṃ passa yasañca me; Ānubhāvañca me passa, vaṇṇaṃ passa jutiñca me. ‘‘Ye ca te dīghamaddhānaṃ, dhammaṃ assosuṃ gotama; Pattā te acalaṭṭhānaṃ, yattha gantvā na socare’’ti. (vi. va. 859-860);
说完这两首偈颂,他就离开了。巴利
Imā dve gāthā vatvā pakkāmi.
141 这里“无论什么”中的“无论”是一个不定指的词,“什么”也一样。“而”只是说话时的修饰成分。所以,说“无论什么”,就是把一切可知之法毫无遗漏地全部包括进去了。或者说,“而”这个虚词是用来显示特殊含义的。借此,“正自觉者”这个词,从简略和详细两方面,说明了导师对四圣谛的现证觉悟;而“佛”这个词,则说明了对其他一切可知之法的通达觉悟。或者也可以说,前者显示的是导师证悟智慧的威力,后者显示的是说法智慧的威力。这样,下面将要说的差别就更加清楚了。从一切对立面中彻底解脱出来,所以叫“解脱”,也就是最上的道。在这道之中,最终的就是最上果。在那里,当证得该果时所能得到的,就是“解脱究竟智”,再加上一切知智,也就是全部的佛智。如此生起——在这里:巴利
141.Yaṃ pana kiñcīti ettha yanti aniyamitavacanaṃ. Tathā kiñcīti. Panāti vacanālaṅkāramattaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ kiñcīti ñeyyassa anavasesapariyādānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Panāti vā visesatthadīpako nipāto. Tena ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti iminā saṅkhepato, vitthārato ca satthu catusaccābhisambodho vutto. ‘‘Buddho’’ti pana iminā tadaññassapi ñeyyassāvabodho. Purimena vā satthu paṭivedhañāṇānubhāvo, pacchimena desanāñāṇānubhāvo. Pīti upari vuccamāno viseso jotīyati. Sabbaso paṭipakkhehi vimuccatīti vimokkho, aggamaggo. Tassa anto aggaphalaṃ, tattha bhavaṃ tasmiṃ laddhe laddhabbato vimokkhantikañāṇaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ sabbampi buddhañāṇaṃ. Evaṃ pavattoti ettha –
因为具足一切知,所以是佛;因为具足一切见,所以是佛;因为不须依靠他人来引导,所以是佛;因为已经绽放(智慧),所以是佛;因为被称为漏尽者,所以是佛;因为被称为无染着者,所以是佛;因为已经完全远离贪,所以是佛;因为已经完全远离嗔,所以是佛;因为已经完全远离痴,所以是佛;因为已经完全远离烦恼,所以是佛;因为已经走上唯一的道路,所以是佛;因为独自证得无上正等正觉,所以是佛;因为摧毁了无明、获得了智慧,所以是佛。“佛”这个名称,不是母亲取的,不是父亲取的,不是兄弟取的,不是姐妹取的,不是朋友同伴取的,不是亲戚血亲取的,不是沙门婆罗门取的,不是天神取的。这是诸佛世尊在菩提树下,与证得一切知智同时所证得的、属于解脱究竟的施设,也就是“佛”。巴利
‘‘Sabbaññutāya buddho, sabbadassāvitāya buddho, anaññaneyyatāya buddho, visavitāya buddho, khīṇāsavasaṅkhātena buddho, nirupalepasaṅkhātena buddho, ekantavītarāgoti buddho, ekantavītadosoti buddho, ekantavītamohoti buddho, ekantanikkilesoti buddho, ekāyanamaggaṃ gatoti buddho, eko anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti buddho, abuddhivihatattā buddhipaṭilābhā buddho. Buddhoti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kataṃ, na pitarā kataṃ, na bhātarā kataṃ, na bhaginiyā kataṃ, na mittāmaccehikataṃ, na ñātisālohitehi kataṃ, na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṃ, na devatāhi kataṃ. Vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ buddho’’ti (mahāni. 192) –
这是《义释》圣典的排列方式。由于在这里它和《无碍解道》圣典的内容没有差别,所以为了说明依两者中任何一种都能成就其义理,便说“或是无碍解道的方式”,这里的“或”字表示不确定的意思。巴利
Ayaṃ niddesapāḷinayo. Yasmā cettha tassā paṭisambhidāpāḷiyā bhedo natthi, tasmā dvīsu ekenāpi atthasiddhīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭisambhidānayo vā’’ti aniyamattho vā-saddo vutto.
在这里,就像世间上,已经了知的人被称为“已了知”,同样,已经觉悟诸谛的人,因为纯粹是行为者,所以称为佛。就像使树叶枯干的风被称为“枯叶风”,同样,令众生觉悟的人,因为具有使役行为者的含义,所以称为佛;这里使役的含义已经包含在内了。巴利
Tattha yathā loke avagantā ‘‘avagato’’ti vuccati, evaṃ bujjhitā saccānīti buddho suddhakattuvasena. Yathā paṇṇasosā vātā ‘‘paṇṇasusā’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ bodhetā pajāyāti buddho hetukattuvasena, hetuattho cettha antonīto.
“以一切知性而为佛”的意思是:凭借能觉悟一切法的智慧而成为佛。“以一切见性而为佛”的意思是:因为用智眼看见了一切法,所以成为佛。“以不从他闻性而为佛”的意思是:不是由别人使他觉悟,而是自己觉悟,所以成为佛。“以绽放性而为佛”的意思是:像莲花绽放那样,以种种功德开放、舒展的意义而成为佛。接着,“以漏尽者而为佛”等六种说法,是说:就像从沉睡中醒来的人一样,因为从一切烦恼的沉睡中彻底觉醒,所以称为佛。“以行一乘道者而为佛”的意思是:所行之处就是智慧的意义,而智慧的意义也可以得到行道的意思,所以因为行于一乘道而称为佛。“以独自现观无上正自觉者而为佛”的意思是:不是由别人使他觉悟才成为佛,而是自己现观无上正等觉,所以成为佛。“以摧破无明、获得智慧而为佛”:智慧、觉悟、觉了,意思没有差别。其中,就像因为具有红色的性质而称为红布,同样,因为具有佛陀的功德而称为佛,这是为了说明这个意思而说的。此后,“‘佛’这个名称,不是……”等,是为了说明这种施设是随顺意义而立的。这样,由这些理由,也应该知道世尊是佛。巴利
Sabbaññutāya buddhoti sabbadhammabujjhanasamatthāya buddhiyā buddhoti attho. Sabbadassāvitāya buddhoti sabbadhammānaṃ ñāṇacakkhunā diṭṭhattā buddhoti attho. Anaññaneyyatāya buddhoti aññena abodhanīto sayameva buddhattā buddhoti attho. Visavitāya buddhoti nānāguṇavisavanato padumamiva vikasanaṭṭhena buddhoti attho. Khīṇāsavasaṅkhātena buddhoti evamādīhi chahi pariyāyehi niddakkhayavibuddho puriso viya sabbakilesaniddakkhayavibuddhattā buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Ekāyanamaggaṃ gatoti buddhoti gamanatthānaṃ buddhiatthatāya buddhiatthānampi gamanatthatā labbhatīti ekāyanamaggaṃ gatattā buddhoti vuccatīti attho. Eko anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti buddhoti na parehi buddhattā buddho, atha kho sayameva anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhattā buddhoti attho. Abuddhivihatattā buddhipaṭilābhā buddhoti buddhi buddhaṃ bodhoti anatthantaraṃ. Tattha yathā rattaguṇayogato ratto paṭo, evaṃ buddhaguṇayogato buddhoti ñāpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tato paraṃ buddhoti netaṃ nāmantiādi atthānugatāyaṃ paññattīti bodhanatthaṃ vuttanti evamettha imināpi kāraṇena bhagavā buddhoti veditabbaṃ.
142 “他的”是指世尊的。“具足功德、最胜、一切众生中最上、应受尊重之语”的意思是:这句“世尊”,是对具足戒等一切功德、因此成为一切众生中最上者、应受尊重者,出于尊重而说的话。确实如此,因为世间主具有无量、无与伦比的威光与戒等功德殊胜,以先消除一切不利为先导,致力于毫无遗漏地带来利益与安乐,具备无上的修行成就,对包括天人在内的众生给予最大的饶益,并且在无量世界中,对无量众生来说,是最上等的尊重对象。巴利
142.Assāti bhagavato. Guṇavisiṭṭhasabbasattuttamagarugāravādhivacananti sabbehi sīlādiguṇehi visiṭṭhassa tato eva sabbasattehi uttamassa garuno gāravavasena vuttavacanamidaṃ bhagavāti. Tathā hi lokanātho aparimitanirupamappabhāvasīlādiguṇavisesasamaṅgitāya sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya, accantupakāritāya ca aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ uttamagāravaṭṭhānanti.
世尊这个词,是最殊胜的,因为它是用来表达最殊胜者的言语,又由于与最殊胜的功德相伴,所以被称为最胜。另一种说法是,说即是言语,其义为意义。因此,通过世尊这个词所应表达的意义,就是最胜的意思。世尊这个词也是无上,这里也是同样的道理。与尊重相应,是指与可敬的状态相应,由于与尊贵的功德相结合;或者说,他特别值得被尊重,所以叫与尊重相应,意思就是值得尊重。巴利
Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhanti seṭṭhavācakaṃ vacanaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato ‘‘seṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ. Atha vā vuccatīti vacanaṃ, attho. Tasmā yo ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vacanena vacanīyo attho, so seṭṭhoti attho. Bhagavāti vacanamuttamanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogato, garukaraṇaṃ vā sātisayaṃ arahatīti gāravayutto, gāravārahoti attho.
“世尊”这个名称,是由殊胜功德所导致的。以上是简要说的含义。现在想详细分析这个简要说的含义,先以举出要义的方式显示名称本身,所以说“名称有四种”等。
其中,“依状态而立的名称”,是指依各种状态而被认知、依各种状态而施设、称呼的。“依相而立的名称”同样,是指依各种相而称呼的。“依征兆而立的名称”,是指从征兆而来的。“随意而起的名称”,是指随欲而起的、随欲而来的、任意的。
第一个“等”字,摄括了愚者、青年、老者等;第二个,摄括了剃发者、结发者等;第三个,摄括了多闻者、说法者、禅修者等;第四个,摄括了“阿含利沙那”“巴瓦阇那”等。
为了以遮遣的方式确立“依征兆而立的名称”所说的含义,便说“非因摩诃摩耶……”等。
“以解脱为归结的名称”,以此显示这一名称是在圣者种姓出生的刹那便已生起的。如果是以解脱为归结的名称,那为什么与其他漏尽者不共呢?回答说:“与获得一切知智共起。”因为诸佛的阿拉汉果在成就时,是与一切知智等所有佛陀功德一同成就的。因此说“以解脱为归结的名称”。
“亲证的施设”,是指以对一切法的亲证为因的施设。又或者,“亲证的施设”指现量成就的施设。因为此名称是以那功德为因的,而那些功德对导师来说是现量成就的,所以这个名称也像那些功德一样,是亲证成就的,而不是仅凭他人的称呼而已——这是本意。巴利
Guṇavisesahetukaṃ ‘‘bhagavā’’ti idaṃ bhagavato nāmanti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato vibhajitukāmo nāmaṃyeva tāva atthuddhāravasena dassento ‘‘catubbidhaṃ vā nāma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha āvatthikanti avatthāya viditaṃ taṃ taṃ avatthaṃ upādāya paññattaṃ voharitaṃ. Tathā liṅgikaṃ tena tena liṅgena voharitaṃ. Nemittikanti nimittato āgataṃ. Adhiccasamuppannanti yadicchāya pavattaṃ, yadicchāya āgataṃ yadicchakaṃ. Paṭhamena ādi-saddena bālo, yuvā, vuḍḍhoti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti, dutiyena muṇḍī, jaṭīti evamādiṃ, tatiyena bahussuto, dhammakathiko, jhāyīti evamādiṃ, catutthena aghamarisanaṃ pāvacananti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Nemittika’’nti vuttamatthaṃ byatirekavasena patiṭṭhāpetuṃ ‘‘na mahāmāyāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vimokkhantika’’nti iminā idaṃ nāmaṃ ariyāya jātiyā jātakkhaṇeyeva jātanti dasseti. Yadi vimokkhantikaṃ, atha kasmā aññehi khīṇāsavehi asādhāraṇanti āha ‘‘saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā’’ti. Buddhānañhi arahattaphalaṃ nipphajjamānaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇādīhi sabbehi buddhaguṇehi saddhiṃyeva nipphajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vimokkhantika’’nti. Sacchikā paññattīti sabbadhammānaṃ sacchikiriyānimittā paññatti. Atha vā sacchikā paññattīti paccakkhasiddhā paññatti. Yaṃguṇanimittā hi sā, te satthu paccakkhabhūtāti guṇā viya sāpi sacchikatā eva nāma hoti, na paresaṃ vohāramattenāti adhippāyo.
143 “他们说”这句话,是因为对大长老的尊重而用复数来说,或者是针对结集者们所作的复述之语而说的。他拥有自在等种种殊胜品质的“薄伽”,所以称为“薄伽者”。“已破”的意思是,他破除了贪等恶法,也就是“已破者”。“以多种方法”,是指以身修习等许多修习次第。“善修习其自性”,是指正确地修习了自身本性。这里的属格具有主格的含义。巴利
143.Vadantīti mahātherassa garubhāvato bahuvacanenāha, saṅgītikārehi vā katamanuvādaṃ sandhāya. Issariyādibhedo bhago assa atthīti bhagī. Akāsi bhagganti rāgādipāpadhammaṃ bhaggaṃ akāsi, bhaggavāti attho. Bahūhi ñāyehīti kāyabhāvanādikehi anekehi bhāvanākkamehi. Subhāvitattanoti sammadeva bhāvitasabhāvassa. Paccatte cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.
在释义中所说的方法,这里就是释义的方法——巴利
Niddese vuttanayenāti etthāyaṃ niddesanayo –
“世尊”是一个表达恭敬的称呼。此外,因为已经破除贪,所以是世尊;因为已经破除嗔,所以是世尊;因为已经破除痴,所以是世尊;因为已经破除慢,所以是世尊;因为已经破除邪见,所以是世尊;因为已经破除渴爱,所以是世尊;因为已经破除烦恼,所以是世尊;因为已经分析、分别、广泛分别法宝,所以是世尊;因为已经终结了一切存在,所以是世尊;因为已经修习了身、修习了戒、修习了心、修习了慧,所以是世尊。又因为世尊已经亲近荒野、林间、偏远的坐卧处——那些地方声音少、喧闹少、远离人群、适合独自静修,所以是世尊。又因为世尊是衣服、食物、坐卧处、生病时所需的医药等资具的享有者,所以是世尊。又因为世尊是义味、法味、解脱味、增上戒、增上心、增上慧的享有者,所以是世尊。又因为世尊是四种禅、四种无量、四种无色定的享有者,所以是世尊。又因为世尊是八种解脱、八种胜处、九种次第住定成就的享有者,所以是世尊。又因为世尊是十种想修习、十种遍处定成就、入出息念定、不净观成就的享有者,所以是世尊。又因为世尊是四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八圣道的享有者,所以是世尊。又因为世尊是十种如来力、四种无畏、四种无碍解、六种神通、六种佛陀法的享有者,所以是世尊。“世尊”这个名称……中略……是亲证的施设,即此世尊。巴利
‘‘Bhagavāti gāravādhivacanametaṃ. Apica bhaggarāgoti bhagavā, bhaggadosoti bhagavā, bhaggamohoti bhagavā, bhaggamānoti bhagavā, bhaggadiṭṭhīti bhagavā, bhaggataṇhoti bhagavā, bhaggakilesoti bhagavā, bhaji vibhaji pavibhaji dhammaratananti bhagavā, bhavānaṃ antakaroti bhagavā, bhāvitakāyo bhāvitasīlo bhāvitacitto bhāvitapaññoti bhagavā, bhaji vā bhagavā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppānīti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānanti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā attharasassa dhammarasassa vimuttirasassa adhisīlassa adhicittassa adhipaññāyāti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ catunnaṃ appamaññānaṃ catunnaṃ arūpasamāpattīnanti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ abhibhāyatanānaṃ navannaṃ anupubbavihārasamāpattīnanti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā dasannaṃ saññābhāvanānaṃ dasannaṃ kasiṇasamāpattīnaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhissa asubhasamāpattiyāti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ catunnaṃ sammappadhānānaṃ catunnaṃ iddhipādānaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ pañcannaṃ balānaṃ sattannaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassāti bhagavā, bhāgī vā bhagavā dasannaṃ tathāgatabalānaṃ catunnaṃ vesārajjānaṃ catunnaṃ paṭisambhidānaṃ channaṃ abhiññānaṃ channaṃ buddhadhammānanti bhagavā, bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ…pe… sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ bhagavā’’ti (mahāni. 83).
在这里,“尊重的称呼”等词,虽然在偈颂里没有按照出现的先后顺序逐一解释,但应当知道,它们都适合作为那些词的解释。其中,“尊重的称呼”是指表达对尊长之尊重的词语。“已分别”是指按部分来讲说,因此说“已辨析”。“法宝”是指道、果等圣法之宝。再者,“已亲近”是指已侍奉。“享有者”是指拥有份额的人。再者,“享有者”是指习惯于亲近的人。“义味”是指以义为依托的味。也就是说,站在解脱处的立场上说法的人和听法的人,缘于那个义而生起的喜与悦,就是义味。缘于法而生起的,是法味。关于这一点,有“得义之受用,得法之受用”的说法。“解脱味”是指解脱本身的味,或者以解脱为依托的味。“十种想修习”是指无常想等十种想修习。“六种佛陀法”是指六种不共智而说的。各处“世尊”一词的构词,应当按词源学的方法来理解。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘gāravādhivacana’’ntiādīni yadipi gāthāyaṃ āgatapadānukkamena na niddiṭṭhāni, yathārahaṃ pana tesaṃ sabbesampi niddesabhāvena veditabbāni. Tattha gāravādhivacananti garūnaṃ garubhāvavācakaṃ vacanaṃ. Bhajīti bhāgaso kathesi. Tenāha ‘‘vibhajī’’ti. Dhammaratananti maggaphalādiariyadhammaratanaṃ. Puna bhajīti sevi. Bhāgīti bhāgadheyyavā. Puna bhāgīti bhajanasīlo. Attharasassāti atthasannissayassa rasassa. Vimuttāyatanasīse hi ṭhatvā dhammaṃ kathentassa, suṇantassa ca tadatthaṃ ārabbha uppajjanakapītisomanassaṃ attharaso. Dhammaṃ ārabbha dhammaraso. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammaveda’’nti (a. ni. 6.10). Vimuttirasassāti vimuttibhūtassa, vimuttisannissayassa vā rasassa. Saññābhāvanānanti aniccasaññādīnaṃ dasannaṃ saññābhāvanānaṃ. Channaṃ buddhadhammānanti cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha ‘‘bhagavā’’ti saddasiddhi niruttinayena veditabbā.
144 虽然用“bhāgyavā”等词所表达的含义,已经包含在“bhagī bhajī”这句释义偈颂里了,但词的成立、义项区分、义理联结等注释方式,跟那种方式还是不一样,所以说“这是另一种方法”。所谓“ādi”,是用“ādi”这个词涵盖了三种特征:音变、音省略,以及依词根含义来搭配。“saddanayena”就是依语法的方法。因为“pisodara”等词属于不规则类,所以说“取pisodarādi类的纳入这一特征”。纳入本身就是其特征。所谓纳入,就是把它归入那一类。“pārappatta”指达到最胜、成就波罗蜜的状态。“bhāgya”指善。其中,道所摄的善能产生出世间乐,其他的善能产生世间乐;或者,其他的善若成为解脱的资粮,也可间接地产生出世间乐。巴利
144. Yadipi ‘‘bhāgyavā’’tiādīhi padehi vuccamāno attho ‘‘bhagī bhajī’’ti niddesagāthāya saṅgahito eva, tathāpi padasiddhi atthavibhāgaatthayojanādisahito saṃvaṇṇanānayo tato aññākāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ pana aparo nayo’’ti. Ādikanti ādi-saddena vaṇṇavikāro , vaṇṇalopo, dhātuatthena niyojanañcāti imaṃ tividhaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Saddanayenāti byākaraṇanayena. Pisodarādīnaṃ saddānaṃ ākatigaṇabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘pisodarādipakkhepalakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā’’ti. Pakkhipanameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Tappariyāpannatākaraṇaṃ hi pakkhipanaṃ. Pārappattanti paramukkaṃsagataṃ pāramibhāvappattaṃ. Bhāgyanti kusalaṃ. Tattha maggakusalaṃ lokuttarasukhanibbattakaṃ, itaraṃ lokiyasukhanibbattakaṃ, itarampi vā vivaṭṭūpanissayaṃ pariyāyato lokuttarasukhanibbattakaṃ siyā.
贪等是以单独一项的方式被收摄的。同样,颠倒作意是以颠倒的共同性质被收摄,无惭等是以两项的方式。而贪等又以“三种不善根”的方式,以三项被收摄。身恶行等、渴爱杂染等、贪垢等、贪不平等、欲想等、欲思惟等、渴爱戏论等,是三种恶行等。净想等是四种颠倒。“或者,比丘的渴爱因衣服而生起,因托钵食、坐卧具,或者因这样或那样的生存状态而生起”(增支部4.9),如此所说的四种渴爱之生起。“对佛有疑惑,对法、对僧、对学处、对同梵行者忿怒、不悦、心受打击、心生障碍”(长部3.319等),如此所说的五种心的障碍。“于欲未离贪,于身未离贪,于色未离贪,尽情饱食后沉溺于床乐、触乐、睡眠乐而住,为求生某一天众而修梵行”(长部3.320等),如此所说的五种系缚。色之欢喜等是五种欢喜。忿、覆、嫉、诳、恶欲、执取己见,这些是六种争论之根。色渴爱等是六种渴爱之身。巴利
Lobhādayo ekakavasena gahitā. Tathā viparītamanasikāro vipallāsabhāvasāmaññena, ahirikādayo dukavasena. Lobhādayo ca puna ‘‘tividhākusalamūla’’nti tikavasena gahitā. Kāyaduccaritādi-taṇhāsaṃkilesādirāgamalādirāgavisamādikāmasaññādikāmavitakkāditaṇhāpapañcādayo tividhaduccaritādayo. Subhasaññādikā catubbidhavipariyesā. ‘‘Cīvarahetu vā bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, piṇḍapāta , senāsana, itibhavābhavahetu vā’’ti (a. ni. 4.9) evamāgatā cattāro taṇhuppādā. ‘‘Buddhe kaṅkhati, dhamme, saṅghe, sikkhāya, sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khīlajāto’’ti (dī. ni. 3.319; ma. ni. 1.185; a. ni. 5.205; 9.71; vibha. 941) evamāgatāni pañca cetokhīlāni. ‘‘Kāme avītarāgo hoti, kāye avītarāgo, rūpe avītarāgo, yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ anuyutto viharati, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ caratī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.320; ma. ni. 1.186) āgatā pañca vinibandhā. Rūpābhinandanādayo pañcābhinandanā. Kodho, makkho, issā, sāṭheyyaṃ, pāpicchatā, sandiṭṭhiparāmāsoti imāni cha vivādamūlāni. Rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā.
欲贪、嗔恚、见、疑、有、贪、慢、无明,是八种随眠。邪见等八种,是八种邪性。“缘于渴爱而有寻求,缘于寻求而有获得,缘于获得而有分别,缘于分别而有欲贪,缘于欲贪而有执取,缘于执取而有占有,缘于占有而有悭吝,缘于悭吝而有守护,以守护为因而有执杖等”(长部2.103;3.359),这些是九种以渴爱为根本的法。四种常见论、四种一分常见论、四种有边无边论、四种诡辩论、二种无因生论、十六种有想论、八种无想论、八种非有想非无想论、七种断灭论、五种现法涅槃论,这些是六十二种邪见。依内在而有“我是”、“我是如此”、“我是这样”、“我是别样”、“我将是”、“我将是如此”、“我将是这样”、“我将是别样”、“愿我是”、“愿我是如此”、“愿我是这样”、“愿我是别样”、“我当有”、“我当如此有”、“我当这样有”、“我当别样有”、“我不是”、“我当是乐”、“我当是”、“我当是如此”、“我当是这样”、“我当是别样”、“我当非有”、“我当非如此有”、“我当非这样有”、“我当非别样有”等十八种;依外在而有“以此我是”、“以此我是如此”、“以此我是这样”、“以此我是别样”等(分别论975-976)所说的十八种,共三十六种;过去三十六种、未来三十六种、现在三十六种,共一百零八种渴爱行。巴利
Kāmarāgapaṭighadiṭṭhivicikicchābhavarāgamānāvijjā sattānusayā. Micchādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha micchattā. ‘‘Taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo, vinicchayaṃ paṭicca chandarāgo, chandarāgaṃ paṭicca ajjhosānaṃ, ajjhosānaṃ paṭicca pariggaho, pariggahaṃ paṭicca macchariyaṃ, macchariyaṃ paṭicca ārakkhā, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ daṇḍādānādayo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.103; 3.359) ete nava taṇhāmūlakā. Cattāro sassatavādā, cattāro ekaccasassatavādā, cattāro antānantikā, cattāro amarāvikkhepikā, dve adhiccasamuppannikā, soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā, aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā , satta ucchedavādā, pañca paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti etāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni. Ajjhattikassa upādāya ‘‘asmī’’ti hoti, ‘‘itthasmī’’ti, ‘‘evasmī’’ti, ‘‘aññathāsmī’’ti, ‘‘bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘itthaṃ bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘evaṃ bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘aññathā bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘asasmī’’ti, ‘‘sātasmī’’ti, ‘‘siya’’nti, ‘‘itthaṃ siya’’nti, ‘‘evaṃ siya’’nti, ‘‘aññathā siya’’nti, ‘‘apāhaṃ siya’’nti, ‘‘apāhaṃ itthaṃ siya’’nti, ‘‘apāhaṃ evaṃ siya’’nti, ‘‘apāhaṃ aññathā siya’’nti hotīti aṭṭhārasa, bāhirassupādāya ‘‘iminā asmī’’ti hoti, ‘‘iminā itthasmī’’ti, ‘‘iminā evasmī’’ti, ‘‘iminā aññathāsmī’’tiādikā (vibha. 975-976) vuttanayā aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa, atītā chattiṃsa, anāgatā chattiṃsa, paccuppannā chattiṃsāti aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni.
“差别”这个词要分别搭配。这里的搭配是:贪的差别、嗔的差别……一直到一百零八种渴爱行的差别。搭配起来就是:他摧破了众生所有那些带来苦恼和焦灼的烦恼——无数百千种烦恼。因为烦恼无论从所缘等角度还是从生起方式的角度来看,都有无穷无尽的种类。简略来说:在这里,他以彻底断除、令其完全不再生起的方式,摧破了烦恼魔;以断除集、遍知的方式,摧破了蕴魔;以令其失去助伴、令其完全不再生起的方式,摧破了行魔;以摧破其势力、超越其领域的方式,摧破了天子魔和死魔。“灾祸”指的是祸患。因为烦恼对众生的现世和来世都带来不利,以杀害和恼害的意义来说,烦恼本身就是魔,所以叫烦恼魔。以杀戮的意义来说,蕴本身就是魔,所以叫蕴魔。正如经中所说:“不如实了知杀戮之色为‘杀戮之色’”等等。因为行能产生生、老等大灾祸,行本身就是魔,所以叫行魔。以成为杂染之相、以杀害功德的意义来说,天子本身就是魔,所以叫天子魔。因为死能令众生的寿命和生活资具损耗,具有大障碍的性质,死本身就是魔,所以叫死魔。巴利
Pabheda-saddo paccekaṃ sambandhitabbo. Tatthāyaṃ yojanā – lobhappabhedā dosappabhedā yāva aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritappabhedāti. Sabbāni sattānaṃ darathapariḷāhakarāni kilesānaṃ anekāni satasahassāni abhañjīti yojanā. Ārammaṇādivibhāgato hi pavattiākāravibhāgato ca anantappabhedā kilesāti. Saṅkhepatoti ettha samucchedappahānavasena sabbaso appavattikaraṇena kilesamāraṃ, samudayappahānapariññāvasena khandhamāraṃ, sahāyavekallakaraṇavasena sabbathā appavattikaraṇena abhisaṅkhāramāraṃ, balavidhamanavisayātikkamanavasena devaputtamaccumārañca abhañji bhagge akāsi. Parissayānanti upaddavānaṃ. Sampati, āyatiñca sattānaṃ anatthāvahattā māraṇaṭṭhena vibādhanaṭṭhena kilesāva māroti kilesamāro. Vadhakaṭṭhena khandhāva māroti khandhamāro. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘vadhakaṃ rūpaṃ ‘vadhakaṃ rūpa’nti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.85). Jātijarādimahābyasananibbattanena abhisaṅkhārova māroti abhisaṅkhāramāro. Saṃkilesanimittaṃ hutvā guṇamāraṇaṭṭhena devaputtova māroti devaputtamāro. Sattānaṃ jīvitassa, jīvitaparikkhārānañca jānikaraṇena mahābādharūpattā maccu eva māroti maccumāro.
“具足百福相者”:这是说,由于他承载着由无数百种福德所生的大人相,所以显示了他的色身成就;因为色身是其余果报成就的根本和依止处。同时也显示了法身成就,因为智慧成就等是以断除成就为前提的。搭配为:由于具足福德,受到世间人的敬重;由于摧破过失,受到审察者的敬重。从这里往后,也应当这样依序搭配。由于具足福德,在家众如刹帝利等前来亲近他;由于已断除过失,出家者、苦行者和游行者等也前来亲近他,心想“他为调伏过失而说法”。对这些前来亲近的人,他有能力以财施和法施息除他们身心的痛苦,因为财施和法施确实能带来利益。他们以清净的肉眼看见他的色身,以智慧之眼看见他的法身之后,两种痛苦得以止息;而他以财施和法施利益前来亲近的人,并通过“过去我以财施和法施证得了这世间最殊胜的地位,所以你们也应当这样修行”来劝他们走上正道,这就显示了他有能力用世间和出世间的安乐来摄受前来亲近的人。巴利
Satapuññalakkhaṇadharassāti anekasatapuññanibbattamahāpurisalakkhaṇavahato rūpakāyasampatti dīpitā hoti, itarāsaṃ phalasampadānaṃ mūlabhāvato, adhiṭṭhānabhāvato ca. Dhammakāyasampatti dīpitā hoti, pahānasampadāpubbakattā ñāṇasampadādīnaṃ. Bhāgyavatāya lokiyānaṃ bahumatabhāvo. Bhaggadosatāya parikkhakānaṃ bahumatabhāvoti yojanā. Evaṃ ito paresupi yathāsaṅkhyaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Puññavantaṃ hi gahaṭṭhā khattiyādayo abhigacchanti, pahīnadosaṃ pabbajitatāpasaparibbājakādayo ‘‘dosavinayāya dhammaṃ desetī’’ti. Abhigatānañca nesaṃ kāyacittadukkhāpanayane paṭibalabhāvo, āmisadānadhammadānehi upakārasabbhāvato. Rūpakāyaṃ tassa pasādacakkhunā, dhammakāyaṃ paññācakkhunā disvā dukkhadvayassa paṭippassambhanato upagatānañca tesaṃ āmisadānadhammadānehi upakāritā, ‘‘pubbe āmisadānadhammadānehi mayā ayaṃ lokaggabhāvo adhigato, tasmā tumhehipi evameva paṭipajjitabba’’nti evaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ niyojanena abhigatānaṃ lokiyalokuttarasukhehi saṃyojanasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti.
让自心达到自在主宰的状态,就是于自心得自在。依靠这个,能在厌恶等对象上成就“不厌恶想”等住法,也能成就决意神变等神变种类;因为神变等也是靠修心达到自在才得以成就,所以它本身就是心自在。“缩小、轻快等”中的“等”字,包含了广大、到达、堪任、自在、支配、随欲成就这六种。其中,让身体变得微细,是缩小;让身体变得轻快,比如在空中以足行走等,是轻快;让身体变得巨大,是广大;到达想去的地方,是到达;以决意等方式实现所愿,是堪任;自身具有主宰力,是自在;在神变种类上得自在,是支配;无论在空中行走,还是做其他什么事,在任何地方都能达到究竟,是随欲成就。也有人说这是“示现童子形等”。这样,这就是世间共许的八种自在。而世尊的这种自在,是包含在神变种类之中的,并且不与其他声闻等共通,所以说“具足一切行相圆满”。巴利
Sakacitte issariyaṃ attano cittassa vasībhāvāpādanaṃ, yena paṭikkūlādīsu appaṭikkūlasaññitādivihārasiddhi, adhiṭṭhāniddhiādiko iddhividhopi cittissariyameva cittabhāvanāya vasībhāvappattiyā ijjhanato. Aṇimālaghimādikanti ādi-saddena mahimā patti pākammaṃ īsitā vasitā yatthakāmāvasāyitāti ime chapi saṅgahitā. Tattha kāyassa aṇubhāvakaraṇaṃ aṇimā. Lahubhāvo laghimā ākāse padasā gamanādinā. Mahattaṃ mahimā kāyassa mahantatāpādanaṃ. Iṭṭhadesappatti patti. Adhiṭṭhānādivasena icchitanipphādanaṃ pākammaṃ. Sayaṃvasitā issarabhāvo īsitā. Iddhividhe vasībhāvo vasitā. Ākāsena vā gacchato, aññaṃ vā kiñci karoto yattha katthaci vosānappatti yatthakāmāvasāyitā. ‘‘Kumārakarūpādidassana’’ntipi vadanti. Evamidaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ lokiyasammataṃ issariyaṃ. Taṃ pana bhagavato iddhividhantogadhaṃ, anaññasādhāraṇañcāti āha ‘‘sabbākāraparipūraṃ atthī’’ti.
有些人名声有限,而且不清净,因为他们依靠的是不真实的功德,如来则不是这样。为了说明这一点,才说了“遍满三界”等话。其中,在这里,已经证得导师功德的人,以及投生到无色界的人,以“彼世尊即是……”等方式随念世尊的功德时,世尊的名声就会显扬开来,所以说“遍满三界”。正因为证得了真实的功德,所以才极为清净。由于无余的相、随好等一切圆满具足,所以一切行相都圆满。“一切肢节庄严”,就是指一切大小肢体的美好。“已度脱者能令度脱”等话,是说这位世间怙主以心和语的愿求所希望、以身的愿求所期盼的,都恰好如其愿而实现,也就是与愿求相应。已经达到精进波罗蜜,并且属于圣道的正精进,就叫作“精勤”。巴利
Kesañci padesavutti, ayathābhūtaguṇasannissayattā aparisuddho ca yaso hoti, na evaṃ tathāgatassāti dassetuṃ ‘‘lokattayabyāpako’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idha adhigatasatthuguṇānaṃ āruppe uppannānaṃ ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā bhagavato guṇe anussarantānaṃ yaso pākaṭo hotīti āha ‘‘lokattayabyāpako’’ti. Yathābhuccaguṇādhigatattā eva ativiya parisuddho. Anavasesalakkhaṇānubyañjanādisampattiyā sabbākāraparipūrā. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgasirī sabbesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ sobhā. ‘‘Tiṇṇo tāreyya’’ntiādinā yaṃ yaṃ etena lokanāthena icchitaṃ manovacīpaṇidhānavasena, patthitaṃ kāyapaṇidhānavasena. Tathevāti paṇidhānānurūpameva. Vīriyapāramibhāvappatto, ariyamaggapariyāpanno ca sammāvāyāmasaṅkhāto payatto.
“以分别”是指:以结合一切三法、二法句的种种分别。以“缘起等”的“等”字,应当知道:不仅包含了《分别论》中出现的念处等,还包含了摄等、时解脱等、安立等、三法发趣等。苦谛的逼迫义,是对具有苦者的伤害,使他不能自在。有为义,是由各种因缘和合、共同生起而造成的状态。热恼义,是以苦苦等来热恼、烧灼。变易义,是依老与死两种方式而变易。集谛的积集义,是以生起苦的方式而积集。因缘义,就像安立者一样,令“这是苦”生起。结缚义,是与轮回之苦结合、捆绑。障碍义,是障碍道的证得。灭谛的出离义,是因为舍弃一切依着的自性而从中出离,或者成为出离的因。远离义,是不与一切行结合。无为义,是不由任何因缘所造作。不死义,是因为恒常的自性而没有死,或者成为众生不死的因。道谛的出离义,是从轮回之苦中出离。因义,是导向涅槃的状态。见义,是对极微细的涅槃的证悟。增上义,是在观四谛时,对相应法作增上;或者特别是就道增上而说,是所缘增上。因为禅那等虽然也有所缘增上,却没有说“禅那增上法”等,而只说“道增上法”,因此可以知道“道在所缘增上方面有殊胜之处”。这些逼迫等,称为十六行相。那么,为什么在这里,在其他如病、结等行相都存在的情况下,只取这些呢?因为从自相和从通达谛的方面来说,它们最为明显。这个道理在后面讲谛的部分就会清楚。巴利
Bhedehīti sabbattikadukapadasaṃhitehi pabhedehi. Paṭiccasamuppādādīhīti ādi-saddena na kevalaṃ vibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ āgatā satipaṭṭhānādayova saṅgahitā, atha kho saṅgahādayo, samayavimuttādayo, ṭhapanādayo , tikapaṭṭhānādayo ca saṅgahitāti veditabbaṃ. Dukkhasaccassa pīḷanaṭṭho taṃsamaṅgino sattassa hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ. Saṅkhataṭṭho sameccasambhūyapaccayehi katabhāvo. Santāpaṭṭho dukkhadukkhatādīhi santappanaṃ paridahanaṃ. Vipariṇāmaṭṭho jarāya, maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbatā. Samudayassa āyūhanaṭṭho dukkhassa nibbattanavasena sampiṇḍanaṃ. Nidānaṭṭho ‘‘idaṃ taṃ dukkha’’nti nidadantassa viya samuṭṭhāpanaṃ. Saṃyogaṭṭho saṃsāradukkhena saṃyojanaṃ. Palibodhaṭṭho maggādhigamassa nivāraṇaṃ. Nirodhassa nissaraṇaṭṭho sabbūpadhīnaṃ paṭinissaggasabhāvattā tato vinissaṭatā, tannissaraṇanimittatā vā. Vivekaṭṭho sabbasaṅkhāravisaṃyuttatā. Asaṅkhataṭṭho kenacipi paccayena anabhisaṅkhatatā. Amataṭṭho niccasabhāvattā maraṇābhāvo, sattānaṃ maraṇābhāvahetutā vā. Maggassa niyyānaṭṭho vaṭṭadukkhato niggamanaṭṭho. Hetuattho nibbānassa sampāpakabhāvo. Dassanaṭṭho accantasukhumassa nibbānassa sacchikaraṇaṃ. Ādhipateyyaṭṭho catusaccadassane sampayuttānaṃ ādhipaccakaraṇaṃ, ārammaṇādhipatibhāvo vā visesato maggādhipativacanato. Satipi hi jhānādīnaṃ ārammaṇādhipatibhāve ‘‘jhānādhipatino dhammā’’ti evamādiṃ avatvā ‘‘maggādhipatino dhammā’’ icceva vuttaṃ, tasmā viññāyati ‘‘atthi maggassa ārammaṇādhipatibhāve viseso’’ti. Ete ca pīḷanādayo soḷasākārā nāma. Kasmā panettha aññesu rogagaṇṭhādiākāresu vijjamānesu eteva pariggayhantīti? Salakkhaṇato ca saccantaradassanato ca āvibhāvato. Svāyamattho parato saccakathāyameva āvi bhavissati.
天住是指以地遍等为所缘的色界禅那。慈等禅那是梵住。果等至是圣住。由于远离诸欲而身体独处,成为单独的状态,这是身远离。通过初禅等而远离诸盖等,心的远离状态,是心远离。依止的远离就是涅槃。其他是指世间神通之类。巴利
Dibbavihāro kasiṇādiārammaṇāni rūpāvacarajjhānāni. Mettādijjhānāni brahmavihāro. Phalasamāpatti ariyavihāro. Kāmehi vivekaṭṭhakāyatāvasena ekībhāvo kāyaviveko. Paṭhamajjhānādinā nīvaraṇādīhi vivittacittatā cittaviveko. Upadhiviveko nibbānaṃ. Aññeti lokiyābhiññādike.
以烦恼和造作的力量,在诸有中轮回流转,而这里以渴爱为主导,所以说“称为渴爱的行走”。已吐出的:通过圣道之门吐出来,以不再吞回去的方式彻底丢弃。为了说明“世尊”是依照词源规则而称为的,所以说道“如同……腰带”。巴利
Kilesābhisaṅkhāravasena bhavesu paribbhamanaṃ, so ca taṇhāppadhānoti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ gamana’’nti. Vantanti ariyamaggamukhena uggiritaṃ puna apaccāvamanavasena chaḍḍitaṃ. Bhagavāti vuccati niruttinayenāti dassento āha ‘‘yathā…pe… mekhalā’’ti.
另一种解释:具足福分,所以叫世尊;已经受用过,所以叫世尊;在福分中行走,所以叫世尊;在诸福分中行走,所以叫世尊;已经吃过,所以叫世尊;在福分中吐出,所以叫世尊。在福分中吐出,所以叫世尊。巴利
Aparo nayo – bhāgavāti bhagavā, bhatavāti bhagavā, bhāge vanīti bhagavā, bhage vanīti bhagavā, bhattavāti bhagavā, bhage vamīti bhagavā. Bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
世尊是有福分者,是受用者,在福分中、在福分中也是受用者;
吐出诸分,也同样吐出诸分;吐出故,为世尊、胜者。巴利
Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino.
在这里,为什么说“世尊”是“拥有诸分”呢?因为戒等法蕴、功德部分,这些只属于如来,不与他人共有,无与伦比,在如来身上确实存在、可以找到。也就是说,他有戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见,有惭、愧,有信、精进,有念、正知,有戒清净、见清净,有止、观,有三善根、三善行、三正思惟、三无过失想、三界,有四念处、四正勤、四神足、四圣道、四圣果、四无碍解、四决定投生趣处的智、四圣种、四无畏智,有五精勤支、五支正定、五智正定、五根、五力、五出离界、五解脱处智、五成熟解脱想,有六随念处、六恭敬、六出离界、六常住处、六无上、六通达分想、六神通、六不共智,有七不退法、七圣法、七圣财、七觉支、七善士法、七消尽烦恼的事、七想、七应受供养者的施设、七识住的施设、七漏尽者之力的施设,有八种获得慧的因的施设、八正道支、八超越世间法、八精勤事、八非时施设、八大人思惟、八胜处的施设、八解脱,有九种以如理作意为根本的法、九种清净精勤支、九有情居的施设、九种灭除嗔恨的法、九想、九种差别、九次第住,有十种成为救护者的法、十遍处、十善业道、十正道支、十圣居、十无学法、十如来力,有十一种慈心的功德、十二种法轮的形态、十三头陀功德、十四佛智、十五种成熟解脱的法、十六种入出息念,有十六种应以后续道断除的法、十八种佛的法、十九种省察智、四十四种智的事、五十种生灭智、五十余种善法、七十七种智的事、以二十四俱胝百千种等至所行的大金刚智,以及以无量方式对周遍缘起广泛抉择、审察、开示的智,还有在无边世界界域中对无边众生的种种意乐等加以分别的智。像这样等等,具有无量无数种类的、不共他人的、无与伦比的功德部分、功德之分,都存在、都可以找到。因此,因为如来具有如上所说的这些功德部分,所以说他“拥有诸分”。本来应说“bhāgavā”,但把“ā”音缩短,就说成“bhagavā”。这样,首先依“拥有诸分”而称为世尊。巴利
Tattha kathaṃ bhāgavāti bhagavā? Ye te sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā guṇakoṭṭhāsā, te anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā tathāgatassa atthi upalabbhanti. Tathā hissa sīlaṃ samādhi paññā vimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ, hirī ottappaṃ, saddhā vīriyaṃ, sati sampajaññaṃ, sīlavisuddhi diṭṭhivisuddhi, samatho vipassanā, tīṇi kusalamūlāni, tīṇi sucaritāni, tayo sammāvitakkā, tisso anavajjasaññā, tisso dhātuyo, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, cattāro ariyamaggā, cattāri ariyaphalāni, catasso paṭisambhidā, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇāni, cattāro ariyavaṃsā, cattāri vesārajjañāṇāni, pañca padhāniyaṅgāni, pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi, pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhi, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, pañca nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, pañca vimuttāyatanañāṇāni, pañca vimuttiparipācanīyā saññā, cha anussatiṭṭhānāni, cha gāravā, cha nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, cha satatavihārā, cha anuttariyāni, cha nibbedhabhāgiyā saññā, cha abhiññā, cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni, satta aparihāniyā dhammā, satta ariyadhammā, satta ariyadhanāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, satta sappurisadhammā, satta nijjaravatthūni, satta saññā, sattadakkhiṇeyyapuggaladesanā, sattaviññāṇaṭṭhitidesanā, sattakhīṇāsavabaladesanā, aṭṭhapaññāpaṭilābhahetudesanā, aṭṭha sammattāni, aṭṭhalokadhammātikkamā, aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni, aṭṭhaakkhaṇadesanā, aṭṭha mahāpurisavitakkā, aṭṭhaabhibhāyatanadesanā, aṭṭha vimokkhā, nava yonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā, nava pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgāni, navasattāvāsadesanā, nava āghātapaṭivinayā, nava saññā, nava nānattā, nava anupubbavihārā, dasa nāthakāraṇā dhammā, dasa kasiṇāyatanāni, dasa kusalakammapathā, dasa sammattāni, dasa ariyavāsā, dasa asekkhadhammā, dasa tathāgatabalāni, ekādasa mettānisaṃsā, dvādasa dhammacakkākārā, terasa dhutaguṇā, cuddasa buddhañāṇāni, pañcadasa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā, soḷasavidhā ānāpānassati, soḷasa aparantapanīyā dhammā, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammā, ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, catucattālīsa ñāṇavatthūni , paññāsa udayabbayañāṇāni, paropaññāsa kusaladhammā, sattasattatiñāṇavatthūni, catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattisañcārimahāvajirañāṇaṃ, anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānapavicayapaccavekkhaṇadesanāñāṇāni, tathā anantāsu lokadhātūsu anantānaṃ sattānaṃ āsayādivibhāvanañāṇāni cāti evamādayo anantāparimāṇabhedā anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā saṃvijjanti upalabbhanti. Tasmā yathāvuttavibhāgā guṇabhāgā assa atthīti bhāgavāti vattabbe ā-kārassa rassattaṃ katvā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto. Evaṃ tāva bhāgavāti bhagavā.
戒等一切功德,无余皆住善逝中,
是故彼名为“世尊”。巴利
Yasmā sīlādayo sabbe, guṇabhāgā asesato; Vijjanti sugate tasmā, ‘‘bhagavā’’ti pavuccati.
世尊是怎样“已拥有”的呢?那些为了利益一切世间而发起精勤、把人性等八种法聚集起来、为了正等觉而立下大愿的大菩萨们所应当圆满的布施波罗蜜、持戒波罗蜜、出离波罗蜜、智慧波罗蜜、精进波罗蜜、忍耐波罗蜜、真实波罗蜜、决意波罗蜜、慈波罗蜜、舍波罗蜜——这十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十最上波罗蜜,共三十种波罗蜜;还有布施等四种摄事,真实等四种决意;舍弃自我、舍弃眼睛、舍弃财富、舍弃王位、舍弃妻儿,这五种大舍;过去努力、过去行、说法、利益亲族之行、利益世间之行、利益佛之行等等——或者简要地说,一切福德资粮、智慧资粮、成佛之法,从大愿开始,在四大不可计数又十万劫的时间里,不会变成退堕的部分、杂染的部分或停滞的部分,而只会越来越殊胜。像这样殷重地、不间断地、无余地已经拥有、已经完全拥有,所以应当说“bhatavā”,按照语源规则把t变成g,就说成“bhagavā”。或者,“bhatavā”的意思是:他按照所说的方式,承载、完全承载、圆满了那些成佛之法。这样,也是以“已拥有者”的含义而称为世尊。巴利
Kathaṃ bhatavāti bhagavā? Ye te sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannehi manussattādike aṭṭha dhamme samodhānetvā sammāsambodhiyā katamahābhinīhārehi mahābodhisattehi paripūretabbā dānapāramī, sīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccaadhiṭṭhānamettāupekkhāpāramīti dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsa pāramiyo, dānādīni cattāri saṅgahavatthūni, saccādīni cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni, attapariccāgo, nayana, dhana, rajja, puttadārapariccāgoti pañca mahāpariccāgā, pubbayogo, pubbacariyā, dhammakkhānaṃ, ñātatthacariyā, lokatthacariyā, buddhatthacariyāti evamādayo, saṅkhepato vā sabbe puññasambhārañāṇasambhārabuddhakārakadhammā, te mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya kappānaṃ satasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyāni yathā hānabhāgiyā, saṃkilesabhāgiyā, ṭhitibhāgiyā vā na honti, atha kho uttaruttari visesabhāgiyāva honti, evaṃ sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ anavasesato bhatā sambhatā assa atthīti bhatavāti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto niruttinayena ta-kārassa ga-kāraṃ katvā. Atha vā bhatavāti teyeva yathāvutte buddhakārakadhamme vuttanayena bhari sambhari, paripūresīti attho. Evampi bhatavāti bhagavā.
为了正等觉,一切布施波罗蜜等法;
这位救护者已经修积了种种资粮,因此也被称为世尊。巴利
Sammāsambodhiyā sabbe, dānapāramiādike; Sambhāre bhatavā nātho, tasmāpi bhagavā mato.
世尊为什么被称为“护持分者”呢?那些天界日常受用的等至分,数量有二十四万亿那么多,世尊为了利益世间,也为了自己现法乐住,日复一日、从不间断地护持、亲近、修习、多作这些分,所以世尊被称为“护持分者”。另一种说法是:在应当证知的各种法中——比如善法等、蕴等——有从略说的角度分为四种现观分,也就是应遍知分、应断分、应作证分、应修习分;广说则如“眼应遍知……乃至老死应遍知”等,有种种应遍知分;如“眼之集应断……乃至老死之集应断”等,有应断分;如“眼之灭应作证……乃至老死之灭应作证”等,有应作证分;如“眼灭之道”等,以及“四念处”等,有种种不同类别的应修习分。对于这一切法,世尊都随其所宜,以行境修习和亲近的方式加以护持、亲近。因此,世尊也被称为“护持分者”。还有一种说法是:那些戒等法蕴,是与弟子们共通的功德部分、功德分,世尊以大悲心护持、希求这些功德分,心想:“怎样才能把这些功德分安立在应调伏者的相续中呢?”而他的这种希求,最终成就了如其所愿的果。因此,世尊也被称为“护持分者”。巴利
Kathaṃ bhāge vanīti bhagavā? Ye te catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakasamāpattibhāgā, te anavasesato lokahitatthaṃ, attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ niccakappaṃ niccakappaṃ vani bhaji sevi bahulamakāsīti bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā abhiññeyyadhammesu, kusalādīsu, khandhādīsu ca ye te pariññeyyādivasena saṅkhepato vā catubbidhā abhisamayabhāgā, vitthārato pana ‘‘cakkhuṃ pariññeyyaṃ…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ pariññeyya’’ntiādinā anekapariññeyyabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa samudayo pahātabbo…pe… jarāmaraṇassa samudayo pahātabbo’’tiādinā pahātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodho…pe… jarāmaraṇassa nirodho sacchikātabbo’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.21) sacchikātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’tiādinā, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā ca anekabhedā bhāvetabbabhāgā ca dhammā, te sabbe vani bhaji yathārahaṃ gocarabhāvanāsevanānaṃ vasena sevi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā ye ime sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā sāvakehi sādhāraṇā guṇakoṭṭhāsā guṇabhāgā, ‘‘kinti nu kho te veneyyasantānesu patiṭṭhapeyya’’nti mahākaruṇāya vani abhipatthayi, sā cassa abhipatthanā yathādhippetaphalāvahā ahosi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā.
于所知等至功德分,如来受用并希求;
为利众生故,世尊由是(得名)。巴利
Yasmā ñeyyasamāpatti-guṇabhāge tathāgato; Bhaji patthayi sattānaṃ, hitāya bhagavā tato.
世尊为什么称为“bhagavā”(具足幸福者)呢?简单来说,已作功德、具足修行的人,随自己的能力所爱乐、所亲近的,就叫作bhaga,也就是世间和出世间的成就。其中,先说世间方面:如来在成等正觉之前,还是菩萨的时候,就已在最高层次的幸福中爱乐、亲近、受用,安住于此,彻底具足诸成佛之法,使诸佛之法得以圆满成熟。成佛之后,他也在那些没有过失、带来安乐、不共于他人的出世间幸福中——甚至出世间亦复如是——爱乐、亲近、受用。广说则包括:地方王权、主权、转轮王的成就、天王的成就等,以及禅那、解脱、定、等至、智见、修道、证果等超越常人的法——在种种不共于他人的幸福中,他爱乐、亲近、受用。因此,世尊也称为“bhagavā”(具足幸福者)。巴利
Kathaṃ bhage vanīti bhagavā? Samāsato tāva katapuññehi payogasampannehi yathāvibhavaṃ bhajīyantīti bhagā, lokiyalokuttarasampattiyo. Tattha lokiye tāva tathāgato sambodhito pubbe bodhisattabhūto paramukkaṃsagate vani bhaji sevi, yattha patiṭṭhāya niravasesato buddhakārakadhamme samannānento buddhadhamme paripācesi. Buddhabhūto pana te niravajjasukhūpasaṃhite anaññasādhāraṇe lokuttarepi vani bhaji sevi. Vitthārato pana padesarajjaissariyacakkavattisampattidevarajjasampattiādivasena, jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattiñāṇadassanamaggabhāvanāphalasacchikiriyādiuttarimanussadhammavasena ca anekavihite anaññasādhāraṇe bhage vani bhaji sevi. Evampi bhage vanīti bhagavā.
世间有种种成就,还有众多出世间的成就;
正自觉者已经受用了那一切,所以他也被称为世尊。巴利
Yā tā sampattiyo loke, yā ca lokuttarā puthū; Sabbā tā bhaji sambuddho, tasmāpi bhagavā mato.
为什么说世尊是“有恭敬者”呢?因为他有众多恭敬而信念坚固的弟子,所以称为“有恭敬者”。如来具足大悲、一切知智等无量、无可比拟的威德功德,因此是一切众生中最殊胜的;他以先消除一切不利为前提,无余地为众生带来利益与安乐,以无上的修行成就,对包括天人在内的一切众生作最大的饶益;他的色身以三十二大丈夫相、八十随形好、一寻身光等不共他人的殊胜功德所庄严;他具足以真实功德证得、依“彼世尊即是如此”等方式流传、遍满三界、广大而极清净的称扬之声;他善住于少欲、知足等已达究竟彼岸的德行中;他具足十力、四无畏等无上殊胜功德。在“以颜色为量、信颜色;以声音为量、信声音;以粗陋为量、信粗陋;以法为量、信法”这四种量度的世间人群中,他全然能令人生起净信,因此是彻底清净的。他成为无数天人等众生恭敬、尊重、崇敬的对象,是最高的爱敬与亲近之处。那些安住于他的教导、具足不动净信的人,无论沙门、婆罗门、天、魔、梵天,谁都无法动摇他们的亲近与恭敬。他们即使舍弃自己的生命,也绝不会舍弃对他的净信,也不会舍弃对他教令的坚固恭敬。因此他说:巴利
Kathaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā? Bhattā daḷhabhattikā assa bahū atthīti bhattavā. Tathāgato hi mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiaparimitanirupamappabhāvaguṇavisesasamaṅgi bhāvato sabbasattuttamo sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasītianubyañjanabyāmappabhādianaññasādhāraṇaguṇavisesapaṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāya yathābhuccaguṇādhigatena ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinayappavattena lokattayabyāpināsuvipulena, suvisuddhena ca thutighosena samannāgatattā, ukkaṃsapāramippattāsu appicchatāsantuṭṭhiādīsu supatiṭṭhitabhāvato, dasabalacatuvesārajjādiniratisayaguṇavisesasamaṅgibhāvato ca ‘‘rūpappamāṇo rūpappasanno, ghosappamāṇo ghosappasanno, lūkhappamāṇo lūkhappasanno, dhammappamāṇo dhammappasanno’’ti evaṃ catuppamāṇike lokasannivāse sabbathāpi pasādāvahabhāvena samantapāsādikattā aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ sadevamanussānaṃ ādarabahumānagāravāyatanatāya paramapemasambhattiṭṭhānaṃ. Ye tassa ovāde patiṭṭhitā aveccappasādena samannāgatā honti, kenaci asaṃhāriyā tesaṃ sambhatti samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vāti. Tathā hi te attano jīvitapariccāgepi tattha pasādaṃ na pariccajanti, tassa vā āṇaṃ daḷhabhattibhāvato. Tenevāha –
凡是真正知恩、懂得报恩的智者,
他是善友,且具足坚固的忠诚。巴利
‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro, Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotī’’ti. (jā. 2.17.78);
比丘们,就像大海安住在自己的本性中,不会越过海岸线;同样地,比丘们,我为弟子们制定的学处,我的弟子们即使失去生命也不会违越。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi , bhikkhave, mahāsamuddo ṭhitadhammo velaṃ nātivattati, evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṃ mayā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ mama sāvakā jīvitahetupi nātikkamantī’’ti (udā. 45; cūḷava. 385) ca.
依语源法,省略一个 t 音、把另一个变成 g 音之后,世尊这样被称为 bhattavā。巴利
Evaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā niruttinayena ekassa ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā itarassa ga-kāraṃ katvā.
众敬奉者皈依彼具足殊胜功德、志在利益世间之导师,
以是之故,彼被称为世尊。巴利
Guṇātisayayuttassa , yasmā lokahitesino; Sambhattā bahavo satthu, bhagavā tena vuccati.
为什么说“世尊已经吐出了福份”呢?因为如来在还是菩萨的时候,在过去的生生世世中圆满种种波罗蜜时,就已经把称为福份的祥瑞、权势和名声吐了出来、抛弃了,像吐掉一口唾沫那样毫不在意。比如他在善悦童子时、护象童子时、铁屋智者时、默护智者时、小善生时等等,为了圆满出离波罗蜜,舍弃了如同天王统治一般的王国荣华,所舍弃的身体不计其数。即使在最后一生,对于那唾手可得的、如同天界主宰一般的转轮王荣华、四洲的权势,以及依靠转轮王成就、闪耀七宝的名声,他也视如草芥,毫无留恋地舍弃,出家之后证得了正等正觉。因此,因为他吐出了这些祥瑞等福份,所以称为世尊。另一种解释:所谓“宿”就是星宿,与星宿一同运行、流转,所以叫“有宿者”,意思是依靠须弥山、持双山、北俱卢洲、雪山等器世间的殊胜之处而显现的光辉,能持续一劫之久。世尊也吐出了这些,因为他超越了居住其中的众生和他们的居所,断除了与这些相关的欲贪。这样说来,世尊也是因为吐出了福份,所以称为世尊。巴利
Kathaṃ bhage vamīti bhagavā? Yasmā tathāgato bodhisattabhūtopi purimāsu jātīsu pāramiyo pūrento bhagasaṅkhātaṃ siriṃ, issariyaṃ, yasañca vami uggiri kheḷapiṇḍaṃ viya anapekkho chaḍḍayi. Tathā hissa somanassakumārakāle (jā. 1.15.211 ādayo) hatthipālakumārakāle (jā. 1.15.337 ādayo) ayogharapaṇḍitakāle (jā. 1.15.363 ādayo) mūgapakkhapaṇḍitakāle (jā. 2.22.1 ādayo) cūḷasutasomakāleti (jā. 2.17.195 ādayo) evamādīsu nekkhammapāramipūraṇavasena devarajjasadisāya rajjasiriyā pariccattaattabhāvānaṃ parimāṇaṃ natthi. Carimattabhāvepi hatthagataṃ cakkavattisiriṃ devalokādhipaccasadisaṃ catudīpissariyaṃ, cakkavattisampattisannissayaṃ sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasañca tiṇāyapi amaññamāno nirapekkho pahāya abhinikkhamitvā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tasmā ime siriādike bhage vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā, sineruyugandharauttarakuruhimavantādibhājanalokavisesasannissayā sobhā kappaṭṭhiyabhāvato. Tepi bhagavā vami tannivāsasattāvāsasamatikkamanato tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahīti. Evampi bhage vamīti bhagavā.
善逝世尊,因舍转轮王之荣光、名闻、权势与安乐,
复舍世间之心,是故(为善逝世尊)。巴利
Cakkavattisiriṃ yasmā, yasaṃ issariyaṃ sukhaṃ; Pahāsi lokacittañca, sugato bhagavā tato.
世尊是怎样“舍弃诸部分”的呢?所谓“部分”,就是自性法的分类。这些分类按蕴、处、界等来分,其中又按色、受等来分,还按过去等来分,有种种不同。世尊断除了一切戏论、一切轭缚、一切系著、一切结缚,证得了不死界,从而把这一切都吐出、呕出、无所顾恋地抛弃,不再取回。就像这样,他普遍地于一切处吐出、呕出、以无所顾恋的舍弃抛弃了地、水、火、风,眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意,色、声、香、味、触、法,眼识……乃至意识,眼触……乃至意触,眼触所生受……乃至意触所生受,眼触所生想……乃至意触所生想,眼触所生思……乃至意触所生思,色爱……乃至法爱,色寻……乃至法寻,色伺……乃至法伺,也以一一法分别的方式,把一切法分类毫无剩余地吐出、舍弃,以无所顾恋的舍弃把它们抛弃了。这正是所说的:巴利
Kathaṃ bhāge vamīti bhagavā? Bhāgā nāma sabhāvadhammakoṭṭhāsā, te khandhāyatanadhātādivasena, tatthāpi rūpavedanādivasena, atītādivasena ca anekavidhā, te ca bhagavā ‘‘sabbaṃ papañcaṃ, sabbaṃ yogaṃ, sabbaṃ ganthaṃ, sabbaṃ saṃyojanaṃ samucchinditvā amataṃ dhātuṃ samadhigacchanto vami uggiri anapekkho chaḍḍayi na paccāvami. Tathā hesa sabbatthakameva pathaviṃ āpaṃ tejaṃ vāyaṃ, cakkhuṃ sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhaṃ kāyaṃ manaṃ, rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe dhamme, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ…pe… manoviññāṇaṃ, cakkhusamphassaṃ…pe… manosamphassaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ saññaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ saññaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ, rūpataṇhaṃ …pe… dhammataṇhaṃ, rūpavitakkaṃ…pe… dhammavitakkaṃ, rūpavicāraṃ…pe… dhammavicāra’’ntiādinā anupadadhammavibhāgavasenapi sabbeva dhammakoṭṭhāse anavasesato vami uggiri anapekkhapariccāgena chaḍḍayi. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ –
阿难,凡是已经被舍弃、吐出、释放、断除、放下的,如来绝不可能再把它吐回来。这种事根本不存在。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ taṃ, ānanda, cattaṃ vantaṃ muttaṃ pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ tathāgato puna paccāvamissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.183).
世尊也是这样,被称为“已吐出部分者”。或者说,“已吐出部分者”是指:通过圣道智之门,把一切善与不善、有罪与无罪、低劣与殊胜、黑与白有对之法,全都吐出、喷出、无所眷恋地断除、抛弃,并且为了让别人也能达到同样的境地而宣说法。正如这样说:巴利
Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāge vamīti sabbepi kusalākusale sāvajjānavajje hīnapaṇīte kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāge dhamme ariyamaggañāṇamukhena vami uggiri anapekkho pariccaji pajahi, paresañca tathattāya dhammaṃ desesi. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
比丘们,连法都应当舍弃,更何况非正法呢。比丘们,我要为你们讲说筏喻之法,是为了渡过,而不是为了执取。巴利
‘‘Dhammāpi vo, bhikkhave, pahātabbā, pageva adhammā (ma. ni. 1.240). Kullūpamaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāyā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.240).
世尊也是这样,因为吐出了这些部分,所以称为世尊。巴利
Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
大仙人把诸法分成蕴、处、界等等。
黑法与白法既已被舍弃,世尊也因此被认为是(世尊)。巴利
Khandhāyatanadhātādi-dhammabhedā mahesinā; Kaṇhā sukkā yato vantā, tatopi bhagavā mato.
世尊是分享者、受用者,在诸分中受用,也在诸分中乞求受用。
因为能吐出福分,也同样能吐出部分,所以吐出者就是胜者世尊。巴利
‘‘Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino’’ti.
在这里,简要来说,佛陀的功德按自利成就和利他行持分为两种。其中,自利成就又按断德成就和智德成就分为两种,因为威德成就等不离于这两者,所以含摄在其中。利他行持按加行和意乐分为两种。其中,从加行来说,是心不顾念利养、恭敬等,为众生开示能令一切苦解脱的法;从意乐来说,是即使对敌对者也恒常希望他们得到利益,以及等待智慧成熟时机等利他行持;即使通过接受财物等方式来利益众生,也同样是利他行持。因此,为了阐明这些,应当知道经文中采用了“应供”等词。巴利
Ettha ca yasmā saṅkhepato attahitasampattiparahitapaṭipattivasena duvidhā buddhaguṇā, tāsu attahitasampatti pahānasampadāñāṇasampadābhedato duvidhā, ānubhāvasampadādīnaṃ tadavinābhāvena tadantogadhattā. Parahitapaṭipatti payogāsayabhedato duvidhā. Tattha payogato lābhasakkārādinirapekkhacittassa sabbadukkhaniyyānikadhammūpadeso, āsayato paṭiviruddhesupi niccaṃ hitesitā, ñāṇaparipākakālāgamanādiparahitapaṭipatti ca, āmisapaṭiggahaṇādināpi atthacariyā parahitapaṭipatti hotiyeva. Tasmā tesaṃ vibhāvanavasena pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘araha’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这里,用“应供”这个词,是从断德成就的角度说明了世尊自利方面的圆满。用“正自觉者”和“世间解”这两个词,是从智德成就的角度来说明。难道“世间解”这个词不也说明了正自觉吗?确实说明了,但还是有区别:用“正自觉者”这个词,说明的是遍知智的威力;而用“世间解”这个词,说明的是了知意乐、随眠等智的威力。用“明行足”这个词,说明了世尊自利方面的全部圆满。用“善逝”这个词,则从起点开始,说明了世尊自利方面的圆满和利他的实践。用“无上调御丈夫、天人师”这些词,说明了世尊利他的实践。用“佛陀”这个词,说明了世尊自利方面的圆满和利他的实践。这样一来,说了“正自觉者”之后再说“佛陀”这个词,就有了充分的理由。所以这样说:“自己觉悟了,也让其他众生觉悟”等等。用“世尊”这个词,也是从起点开始,说明了世尊自利方面的一切圆满和利他的实践。巴利
Tattha ‘‘araha’’nti iminā padena pahānasampadāvasena bhagavato attahitasampatti vibhāvitā. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho, lokavidū’’ti ca imehi padehi ñāṇasampadāvasena. Nanu ca ‘‘lokavidū’’ti imināpi sammāsambuddhatā vibhāvīyatīti? Saccaṃ vibhāvīyati, atthi pana viseso, ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti iminā sabbaññutaññāṇānubhāvo vibhāvito, ‘‘lokavidū’’ti pana iminā āsayānusayañāṇādīnampi ānubhāvo vibhāvitoti. ‘‘Vijjācaraṇasampanno’’ti iminā sabbāpi bhagavato attahitasampatti vibhāvitā. ‘‘Sugato’’ti pana iminā samudāgamato paṭṭhāya bhagavato attahitasampatti, parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā. ‘‘Anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussāna’’nti imehi padehi bhagavato parahitapaṭipatti vibhāvitā. ‘‘Buddho’’ti iminā bhagavato attahitasampatti, parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā. Evañca katvā ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti vatvā ‘‘buddho’’ti vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘attanāpi bujjhi aññepi satte bodhesī’’tiādi. ‘‘Bhagavā’’ti ca imināpi samudāgamato paṭṭhāya bhagavato sabbā attahitasampatti, parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā.
还有一种分类方式:从因、果以及利益众生这三个角度,简要来说,佛陀的功德有三种。其中,用“阿拉汉、正自觉者、明行足、世间解”这几个词,是从果德圆满的角度来说明佛陀的功德。用“无上者、调御丈夫、导师、天人师”这几个词,是从利益众生的角度来显示佛陀的功德。用“佛陀”这个词,则是从果德和利益众生两个方面来说明佛陀的功德。而用“善逝、世尊”这几个词,应当知道是从因、果、利益众生三个方面来说明佛陀的功德。巴利
Aparo nayo – hetuphalasattūpakāravasena saṅkhepato tividhā buddhaguṇā. Tattha ‘‘arahaṃ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno lokavidū’’ti imehi padehi phalasampattivasena buddhaguṇā vibhāvitā. ‘‘Anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussāna’’nti imehi sattūpakāravasena buddhaguṇā pakāsitā. ‘‘Buddho’’ti iminā phalavasena, sattūpakāravasena ca buddhaguṇā vibhāvitā. ‘‘Sugato bhagavā’’ti pana imehi padehi hetuphalasattūpakāravasena buddhaguṇā vibhāvitāti veditabbaṃ.
145 “他的”指的是修习佛随念这个业处的瑜伽行者。“如是”指的是按照“这里有这样的理路”等所说的方式。“那时”指的是忆念佛功德的时候。“被贪欲缠缚”是指心被贪欲缠缚,也就是与达到缠缚程度的贪欲相应的心,就像森林被盗贼占据一样,被那贪欲所缠缚;因为那是缠缚生起之处,所以说“被贪欲缠缚”。或者说,贪欲的缠缚应当理解为是在那与贪欲相应的心上生起的。在这个解释中,“以贪欲”是指以贪欲为因。“成为正直”是指:由于事先已经去除了身体的弯曲等,又没有谄曲等令心不正直的因素,或者由于没有贪欲等缠缚,没有低下与高举,所以心成就了正直的状态。另外,“成为正直”也可以指:因为业处进入了行道,遣除了昏沉与掉举,依照中道寂止之相而修行,所以心得正直。“以如来为所缘”是指以如来的功德作为所缘。巴利
145.Tassāti buddhānussatikammaṭṭhānikassa yogino. Evanti ‘‘tatrāyaṃ nayo’’tiādinā vuttappakārena. Tasmiṃ samayeti buddhaguṇānussaraṇasamaye. Rāgapariyuṭṭhitanti rāgena pariyuṭṭhitaṃ, pariyuṭṭhānappattehi rāgehi sahitaṃ cittaṃ araññamiva corehi tena pariyuṭṭhitanti vuttaṃ, tassa pariyuṭṭhānaṭṭhānabhāvato, pariyuṭṭhitarāganti attho. Yaṃ vā rāgassa pariyuṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ taṃsahite citte upacaritanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etasmiṃ pakkhe rāgenāti rāgena hetunāti attho. Ujugatamevāti pageva kāyavaṅkādīnaṃ apanītattā, cittassa ca anujubhāvakarānaṃ māyādīnaṃ abhāvato, rāgādipariyuṭṭhānābhāvena vā onatiunnativirahato ujubhāvameva kataṃ. Atha vā ujugatamevāti kammaṭṭhānassa vīthiṃ otiṇṇatāya līnuddhaccavigamanato majjhimasamathanimittapaṭipattiyā ujubhāvameva gataṃ. Tathāgataṃ ārabbhāti tathāgataguṇe ārammaṇaṃ katvā.
“如是他的”就是“这样他的”。接着“彼世尊是应供”等前面说过的方式,他随念佛的功德,这就是前后文的关联。“如是”是按“那时不……”等所说的方法。“倾向于佛功德”就是心朝向佛功德。“寻与伺转起”这句话说明:以佛功德为所缘的业处被寻触及、被寻反复碰触,并且一再地随观。喜生起:由于修习的力量,能产生近行定的强烈喜生起。喜心者:就是具有前面所说那种喜的心。身心的不安:是身轻安和心轻安的对立面,属于微细状态的、与掉举相应的烦恼。平息:就是止息下来。次第地在一刹那:当以佛功德为所缘的修习一层比一层更殊胜地持续运转时,那时诸盖已被镇伏,烦恼已经止息,信等诸根变得非常清净,因为修习纯熟,寻与伺变得格外锐利,强烈的喜生起,以喜为近因的轻安更殊胜地生起,身体轻安的人,作为定之近因的乐变得更稳固而持续,被乐滋润的心,在业处上正确地入定。就这样次第地,在预备阶段,寻等一层比一层更锐利地运转,由于修习的中道寂止实践以及诸根一味,变得最为锐利,在一刹那间,诸禅支生起。世尊就是针对这个而说:巴利
Iccassāti iti assa. ‘‘So bhagavā itipi araha’’ntiādinā pubbe vuttappakārena buddhaguṇe anuvitakkayatoti sambandho. Evanti ‘‘neva tasmiṃ samaye’’tiādinā vuttanayena. Buddhaguṇapoṇāti buddhaguṇaninnā. ‘‘Vitakkavicārā pavattantī’’ti etena buddhaguṇasaṅkhātaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ vitakkāhataṃ, vitakkapariyāhataṃ, punappunaṃ anumajjanañca karotīti dasseti. Pīti uppajjatīti bhāvanāvasena upacārajjhānanipphādikā balavatī pīti uppajjati. Pītimanassa vuttappakārapītisahitacittassa. Kāyacittadarathāti kāyacittapassaddhīnaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtā sukhumāvatthā uddhaccasahagatā kilesā. Paṭippassambhantīti sannisīdanti. Anukkamena ekakkhaṇeti yadā buddhaguṇārammaṇā bhāvanā uparūpari visesaṃ āvahantī pavattati, tadā nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva honti, kilesā sannisinnāva honti, suvisadāni saddhādīni indriyāni honti, bhāvanāya paguṇatāya vitakkavicārā sātisayaṃ paṭukiccāva honti, balavatī pīti uppajjati, pītipadaṭṭhānā passaddhi savisesā jāyati, passaddhakāyassa samādhipadaṭṭhānaṃ sukhaṃ thirataraṃ hutvā pavattati, sukhena anubrūhitaṃ cittaṃ kammaṭṭhāne sammadeva samādhiyati. Evaṃ anukkamena pubbabhāge vitakkādayo uparūpari paṭupaṭutarabhāvena pavattitvā bhāvanāya majjhimasamathapaṭipattiyā indriyānañca ekarasabhāvena paṭutamāni hutvā ekakkhaṇe jhānaṅgāni uppajjanti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ bhagavatā –
摩诃男,当圣弟子忆念如来的时候,那时他的心里不会被贪欲缠住……乐者的心得以等持。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ , mahānāma, samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti…pe… sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti (a. ni. 6.10).
那么,为什么这里禅那没有达到安止呢?回答说:“因为佛功德甚深”等等。因为在甚深的所缘上,止的修习就像船沉入深水一样,找不到立足处。而“甚深”这个词,也涵盖了自性法,因为自性法是甚深的,不是概念。难道不是通过与之相应的概念来把握自性法吗?确实,在预备阶段是能把握的;但当修习增长时,就超越了概念,心只安住在自性法上。难道在自性法上,某些情况下安止也能成就吗,比如第二无色禅等?确实能成就,但那是对单一类型的所缘而言。而这里是多种类型的,为了说明这一点,所以说“由于倾向于忆念种种功德”。即便如此,就像对头发等种种部分作意的人,修习以安止的方式只停留在一个部分上那样,这里为什么不能呢?这个类比不恰当。因为在那种情况下,虽然部分很多,但修习只以单一方式进行,因为只取厌恶相;而在这里,功德是种种不同的,修习不能只停留在一种功德上,因为当佛功德通过修习之力现前时,信心变得强大。正因为如此,才说“由于倾向”。如果只是达到近行定,为什么称为佛随念呢?回答说:“此即”等等。巴利
Kasmā panettha jhānaṃ appanāpattaṃ na hotīti āha ‘‘buddhaguṇānaṃ pana gambhīratāyā’’tiādi. Gambhīre hi ārammaṇe gambhīre udake patitanāvā viya samathabhāvanā patiṭṭhaṃ na labhati, ‘‘gambhīratāyā’’ti ca iminā sabhāvadhammatāpi saṅgahitā. Sabhāvadhammo hi gambhīro na paññatti. Nanu ca tajjāpaññattivasena sabhāvadhammo gayhatīti? Saccaṃ gayhati pubbabhāge, bhāvanāya pana vaḍḍhamānāya paññattiṃ samatikkamitvā sabhāveyeva cittaṃ tiṭṭhati. Nanu ca sabhāvadhammepi katthaci appanā samijjhati dutiyāruppajjhānādīti? Saccaṃ samijjhati, tañca kho ekappakāre ārammaṇe, idaṃ pana nānappakāranti dassento ‘‘nānappakāraguṇānussaraṇādhimuttatāyā’’ti āha. Evampi yathā nānappakāresu kesādikoṭṭhāsesu manasikāraṃ pavattentassa ekasmiṃyeva koṭṭhāse appanāvasena bhāvanā avatiṭṭhati, evamidha kasmā na hotīti? Visamoyaṃ upaññāso. Tattha hi satipi koṭṭhāsabahubhāve ekappakāreneva bhāvanā vattati paṭikkūlākārasseva gahaṇato, idha pana nānappakārena guṇānaṃ nānappakārattā, na ayamekasmiṃyeva guṇe ṭhātuṃ sakkoti bhāvanābalena paccakkhato buddhaguṇesu upaṭṭhahantesu saddhāya balavabhāvato. Teneva hi ‘‘adhimuttatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi upacārappattaṃ jhānaṃ hoti, kathaṃ buddhānussatīti vuttanti āha ‘‘tadeta’’ntiādi.
他具备恭敬和尊重,因为导师的功德身就现前呈现在他心中。正是由此,他的信心变得广大,像不坏净信那样的广大信心。由于以随念佛陀功德的方式修习不断生起,他的念变得广大。由于那些功德极其深奥、种类多样,他的慧变得广大。由于那些功德是殊胜福田,他也获得广大的福德。他充满喜与欢悦,因为佛随念是喜觉支的生起之处。他能承受恐惧和怖畏,因为以佛陀功德为所缘的念能够克服恐惧和怖畏。因此世尊说:“你们应当随念正觉者,恐惧就不会降临于你们。”他能堪忍身苦,因为佛随念使身体之苦如荷叶上的水珠般退去。所谓“共住想”,即与佛共住之想。他的心倾向于佛地,因为佛陀功德的伟大现前呈现。由于修习佛随念,佛陀的功德常常在心中现起,所以说“如同当面见到导师一样”。所谓“未能通达更上者”,即以此修习为基础,却未能通达更上的诸谛。所谓“以善趣为归宿”,即以善趣为来世。巴利
Sagāravo hoti sappatisso, satthu guṇasarīrassa paccakkhato upaṭṭhahanato. Tatoyeva saddhāvepullaṃ aveccappasādasadisaṃ saddhāmahattaṃ. Buddhaguṇānaṃ anussaraṇavasena bhāvanāya pavattattā sativepullaṃ. Tesaṃ paramagambhīratāya, nānappakāratāya ca paññāvepullaṃ. Tesaṃ uḷārapuññakkhettatāya puññavepullañca adhigacchati. Pītipāmojjabahulo hoti pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyattā buddhānussatiyā. Bhayabheravasaho buddhaguṇārammaṇāya satiyā bhayabheravābhibhavanato. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘anussaretha sambuddhaṃ, bhayaṃ tumhāka no siyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.249 thokaṃ visadisaṃ). Dukkhādhivāsanasamattho buddhānussatiyā sarīradukkhassa padumapalāse udakassa viya vinivaṭṭanato . Saṃvāsasaññanti sahavāsasaññaṃ. Buddhabhūmiyaṃ cittaṃ namati buddhaguṇānaṃ mahantabhāvassa paccakkhato upaṭṭhānato. Buddhānussatibhāvanāya sabbadā buddhaguṇānaṃ citte viparivattanato vuttaṃ ‘‘sammukhā satthāraṃ passato viyā’’ti. Uttari appaṭivijjhantoti imāya bhāvanāya upari taṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā saccāni appaṭivijjhanto. Sugatiparāyaṇoti sugatisamparāyo.
不放逸,就是不疏忽、认真投入地持续用功。应当做,就是应该去做。有妙慧者,就是具有善妙智慧的人。如此具大威力,就是像前面说的那样,具备广大的威力,其能力能镇伏盖障等,并成为对导师怀有恭敬等的因。巴利
Appamādanti appamajjanaṃ sakkaccaṃ anuyogaṃ. Kayirāthāti kareyya. Sumedhasoti sundarapañño . Evaṃ mahānubhāvāyāti vuttappakārena nīvaraṇavikkhambhanādisamatthena satthari sagāravabhāvādihetubhūtena mahatā sāmatthiyena samannāgatāya.
2. 法随念的注释巴利
2. Dhammānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
146 在法随念中,词义和自性义开头已经讲过了,所以这里不再重复,只为了说明修习的方法,才接着讲“想要修法随念的人……”等等。那为什么这里不像佛随念那样说“具足不坏净”?难道这六随念不是按顺序为圣弟子们宣说的吗?确实如此,但即便如此,为了说明“戒等功德清净的凡夫也能修成”,这里才没有说“具足不坏净”,而圣弟子则是容易修成的。不过也应该看到,因为巴利经典里出现过,而且在解释佛随念时已经说过了,这个讨论后面还会再提到。巴利
146.Dhammānussatinti ettha padattho, sabhāvattho ca ādito vuttoyevāti taṃ anāmasitvā bhāvanāvidhānameva dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammānussatiṃ bhāvetukāmenāpī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Kasmā panettha buddhānussatiyaṃ viya ‘‘aveccappasādasamannāgatenā’’ti na vuttaṃ. Nanu etā paṭipāṭiyā cha anussatiyo ariyasāvakānaṃ vasena desanaṃ āruḷhāti? Saccametaṃ, evaṃ santepi ‘‘parisuddhasīlādiguṇānaṃ puthujjanānampi ijjhantī’’ti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘aveccappasādasamannāgatenā’’ti idha na vuttaṃ, ariyasāvakānaṃ pana sukhena ijjhantīti. Tathāpi pāḷiyaṃ āgatattā ca buddhānussatiniddese vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, ayañca vicāro parato āgamissateva.
147 “教法”这个词,通过“也”这个字,把出世间法也一起包含进来了。“于其余”是指在“现见的”等词当中。“唯是出世间法”这个限定,是就“现见的”等词的非引申义来说的;但从引申义来说,这些功德在教法当中也同样存在。比如,教法对于多闻、通达圣典、具足最上念与慧的智者来说,因为初善等殊胜,可以自己见到,所以是“现见的”。如果说“不亲近依止老师就得不到”吗?出世间法也一样,只有依靠善友才能成就,导师的教导也是如此。“以现见而胜”这个意思,在摧破外道时,只能按非引申义来理解;在战胜烦恼时,则可以按引申义来理解,因为它是辗转的原因。“值得现见”这个意思也成立,因为它是为了彻底断除一切杂染法、增长清净法而生起的。这个意思应该用这样的经文来说明:“乔达弥!你应当知道,若你了知某些法后,这些法令贪增盛而非离贪,令结缚而非离缚,令执取而非无执取。乔达弥!你应当一决断持守:此非法,此非律,此非导师之教。”(《小品》406;《增支部》8.53)以及“比丘们!法尚且应舍,何况非法。”(《中部》1.240)等。因为是证悟无时的方便,所以是“无时的”。由存在性与清净性,值得说“来见”,所以是“来见的”。正因为如此,对于想超越轮回之苦的人来说,值得把法带到自己心中,或者把心带到法那里,所以是“能带来的”。站在解脱处的开头,通过反复修习,真正获得义味与法味的人,应当由智者各自了知。这样,在“现见的”等词当中,把教法也纳入进来,作意就成立了。巴利
147.Pariyattidhammopīti pi-saddena lokuttaradhammaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Itaresūti sandiṭṭhikādipadesu. Lokuttaradhammovāti avadhāraṇaṃ nippariyāyena sandiṭṭhikādiatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, pariyāyato panete pariyattidhammepi sambhavanteva. Tathā hi pariyattidhammo bahussutena āgatāgamena paramena satinepakkena samannāgatena paññavatā ādikalyāṇatādivisesato sayaṃ daṭṭhabboti sandiṭṭhiko. Ācariyapayirupāsanāya vinā na labbhāti ce? Lokuttaradhammepi samāne kalyāṇamittasannissayeneva sijjhanato, tathā satthusandassanepi. ‘‘Sandiṭṭhiyā jayatī’’ti ayaṃ panattho titthiyanimmaddane nippariyāyatova labbhati , kilesajaye pariyāyato paramparāhetubhāvato. ‘‘Sandiṭṭhaṃ arahatī’’ti ayampi attho labbhateva, sabbaso saṃkilesadhammānaṃ pahānaṃ, vodānadhammānaṃ paribrūhanañca uddissa pavattattā. Ayañca attho ‘‘ye kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi, ime dhammā sarāgāya saṃvattanti no virāgāya, saññogāya saṃvattanti no visaññogāya, saupādānāya saṃvattanti no anupādānāya. Ekaṃsena, gotami, dhāreyyāsi ‘neso dhammo, neso vinayo, netaṃ satthusāsana’’’nti (cūḷava. 406; a. ni. 8.53), ‘‘dhammāpi vo, bhikkhave, pahātabbā, pageva adhammā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.240) ca evamādīhi suttapadehi vibhāvetabbo. Akālikādhigamupāyatāya akāliko. Vijjamānatāparisuddhatāhi ehipassavidhiṃ arahatīti ehipassiko. Tato eva vaṭṭadukkhanittharaṇatthikehi attano citte upanayanaṃ, cittassa vā tattha upanayanaṃ arahatīti opaneyyiko. Vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā paricayena sammadeva atthavedaṃ, dhammavedañca labhantehi paccattaṃ veditabbo viññūhīti. Evaṃ sandiṭṭhikādipadesu pariyattidhammampi pakkhipitvā manasikāro yujjateva.
此即偈颂:因为一切部分都善妙,所以是遍善。法是教法。虽然从胜义上说,并没有离开组成部分而独立存在的所谓集合体,但当人们把那些组成部分看作集合体时,就称它为“偈颂”。为了说明它似乎与那些部分分离,便采用共同主语的表达方式,而说“以第一句为初善”等。“一贯的”:这是指没有太多分支,按照前后连贯而成为一贯;而另一种则依所说法门的分段,有初、中、后各部分。“以序分”:即以显示时间、地点、说法者和听众等为特征的序分典籍。“以结语”:以“此所说”等(《相应部》1.249),或以“如是,凡彼所说,乃缘此而说”(《增支部》10.27)等,对所说法义作结。巴利
Sāti gāthā. Samantabhadrakattāti sabbabhāgehi sundarattā. Dhammassāti sāsanadhammassa. Kiñcāpi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma paramatthato koci natthi, yesu pana avayavesu samudāyarūpena avekkhitesu ‘‘gāthā’’ti samaññā, taṃ tato bhinnaṃ viya katvā saṃsāmivohāraṃ āropetvā dassento ‘‘paṭhamena pādena ādikalyāṇā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Ekānusandhika’’nti idaṃ nātibahuvibhāgaṃ yathānusandhinā ekānusandhikaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, itarassa pana teneva desetabbadhammavibhāgena ādimajjhapariyosānabhāgā labbhantīti. Nidānenāti kāladesadesakaparisādiapadisanalakkhaṇena nidānaganthena. Nigamanenāti ‘‘idamavocā’’tiādikena (saṃ. ni. 1.249), ‘‘iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti (a. ni. 10.27) vā yathāvuttatthanigamanena.
这段讨论特别针对经藏而作注释,所以先依经藏说明法的初善、中善、后善;现在再依经藏和律藏来说明这一点,因此说了“具有因缘与事起”等话。其中,“具有因缘与事起”是指具有如前所说的因缘,也就是有因缘、有事起。“适合所化者”是说:制立学处和宣说法义时,学处是依那项学处的性质而制立,说法是契合所化众生的意乐;如此随顺而进行,也与所化众生相适合。“义”是指所开示的戒等义理。通过“那是什么原因呢?”“诸比丘,譬如”等说法,在各处举出因由和譬喻,所以与因由及例证相连接。巴利
Ayaṃ kathā visesato suttapiṭakasaṃvaṇṇanāti katvā suttapiṭakavasena dhammassa ādikalyāṇādikaṃ dassetvā idāni suttapiṭakavinayapiṭakānaṃ vasena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sanidānasauppattikattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sanidānasauppattikattāti yathāvuttanidānena sanidānatāya, saaṭṭhuppattikatāya ca. Veneyyānaṃ anurūpatoti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā, dhammadesanāya ca taṃtaṃsikkhāpadabhāvena paññāpiyamānassa veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ pavattiyamānassa anurūpato. Atthassāti desiyamānassa ca sīlādiatthassa. ‘‘Taṃ kissa hetu (saṃ. ni. 1.249)? Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.95) tattha tattha hetūpamāgahaṇena hetudāharaṇayuttato.
像这样,先以经与律为途径展示了所学的教法初、中、后三个阶段都圆满美好,现在为了合取三藏来展示彼(初中后善),所以说了“整个也”等话。其中,所谓教法——巴利
Evaṃ suttavinayavasena pariyattidhammassa ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇataṃ dassetvā idāni tīṇi piṭakāni ekajjhaṃ gahetvā taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sakalopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sāsanadhammoti –
不造作一切恶,圆满修成善行;
净化自己的心,这就是诸佛的教法。巴利
‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ, kusalassa upasampadā; Sacittapariyodapanaṃ, etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti. (dha. pa. 183; dī. ni. 2.90) –
像这样被宣说的导师教法,能把它讲清楚的,就是教理文本本身。它以戒为开端而善,因为戒是教法的根本。它以止等为中间而善,因为这些是教法成就的中间部分。它以涅槃为终结而善,因为证得涅槃之后就没有更进一步要做的事了。在教法里,所谓的正行道是靠慧而成立的,而慧又以戒和定为根本,所以说“以戒和定为开端而善”。慧又分为随觉和通达两种,所以把这两者都包括进来说“以观和道为中间而善”。它的成就是果,作用是现证涅槃,从此之后没有应作之事,为了说明这一点而说“以果与涅槃为终善”。或者,以“果”一词指有余涅槃,以“涅槃”一词指无余依涅槃,这两者是教法成就的究竟,所以说“以果与涅槃为终善”。巴利
Evaṃ vuttassa satthusāsanassa pakāsako pariyattidhammo. Sīlena ādikalyāṇo sīlamūlakattā sāsanassa. Samathādīhi majjhekalyāṇo tesaṃ sāsanasampattiyā vemajjhabhāvato. Nibbānena pariyosānakalyāṇo tadadhigamato uttarikaraṇīyābhāvato. Sāsane sammāpaṭipatti nāma paññāya hoti, tassā ca sīlaṃ, samādhi ca mūlanti āha ‘‘sīlasamādhīhi ādikalyāṇo’’ti. Paññā pana anubodhapaṭivedhavasena duvidhāti tadubhayampi gaṇhanto ‘‘vipassanāmaggehi majjhekalyāṇo’’ti āha. Tassa nipphatti phalaṃ, kiccaṃ nibbānasacchikiriyā, tato paraṃ kattabbaṃ natthīti dassento āha ‘‘phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti. Phalaggahaṇena vā saupādisesanibbānamāha, itarena itaraṃ, tadubhayañca sāsanasampattiyā osānanti āha ‘‘phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti.
佛陀的善正觉,也就是正等觉,是初善,因为教法就是从它产生的。以一切方式彻底断除杂染就是清净,再加上法的善法性圆满,这是中善,因为教法的体性就是它。依照导师的教导如实地修行,也就是僧伽的善修行,这是后善,因为依靠它,教法才能在世间牢固地建立。那指的是教法。为了如实性,是指为了世尊所教导的法的如实性、那样的状态。而这种菩提有三种:正等觉、独觉菩提、声闻菩提,因为离开这三种,就没有别的途径能证得涅槃。其中,因为具备一切功德而最为殊胜,又是另外两种菩提的根本,所以以第一种菩提为因,教法是初善;因为功德处于中间,所以以第二种菩提为因,教法是中善;因为次于前两者,又作为前两者的终结,所以以第三种菩提为因,教法是后善。巴利
Buddhassa subodhitā sammāsambuddhatā, tāya ādikalyāṇo tappabhavattā. Sabbaso saṃkilesappahānaṃ vodānaṃ, pāripūrī ca dhammasudhammatā, tāya majjhekalyāṇo taṃsarīrattā. Satthārā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ tathā paṭipatti saṅghasuppaṭipatti, tāya pariyosānakalyāṇo, tāya sāsanassa loke suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato. Tanti sāsanadhammaṃ. Tathattāyāti yathattāya bhagavatā dhammo desito, tathattāya tathabhāvāya. So pana abhisambodhi paccekabodhi sāvakabodhīti tividho , ito aññathā nibbānādhigamassa abhāvato. Tattha sabbaguṇehi aggabhāvato, itarabodhidvayamūlatāya ca paṭhamāya bodhiyā ādikalyāṇatā, guṇehi vemajjhabhāvato dutiyāya majjhekalyāṇatā, tadubhayāvaratāya, tadosānatāya ca sāsanadhammassa tatiyāya pariyosānakalyāṇatā vuttā.
这即是教法。所谓“镇伏诸盖”,是因为站在解脱处的开端听闻正法时,诸盖镇伏之生起。这正是所说的:巴利
Esoti sāsanadhammo. Nīvaraṇavikkhambhanatoti vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā saddhammaṃ suṇantassa nīvaraṇānaṃ vikkhambhanasambhavato. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ –
贤友,比丘无论导师以何种方式教导法,或某位值得恭敬的同梵行者以何种方式教导法,他便相应地于其中获得对义理的领会,获得对法的领会。巴利
‘‘Yathā yathāvuso, bhikkhuno satthā vā dhammaṃ deseti, aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī , tathā tathā so tattha labhati atthavedaṃ labhati dhammaveda’’nti (a. ni. 5.26).
比丘们,当圣弟子竖起耳朵听法的那一刻,他的五盖就被断除了。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ, bhikkhave, samaye ariyasāvako ohitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti, pañcassa nīvaraṇāni tasmiṃ samaye pahīnāni hontī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.219) –
“以及”等等。所谓“能带来止观之乐”,是因为它成就了止的乐和观的乐。这一点也曾说过——巴利
Ca ādi. Samathavipassanāsukhāvahanatoti samathasukhassa ca vipassanāsukhassa ca sampādanato. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
他远离欲乐,远离不善法,进入有寻有伺、由远离而生起喜乐的境界……巴利
‘‘So vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukha’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 1.279; ma. ni. 2.138).
无论从哪里正念观察诸蕴的生灭,
他获得欢喜和喜悦,那是知者们的不死。
正观法者生起非人的喜乐。巴利
‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānataṃ; Amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato’’ti ca. (dha. pa. 374, 373);
“如是所行的教法”的意思是:如能引生止观之乐,或如导师所教,如是所行即是教法之法。所谓“能带来如彼的状态”,是指依靠六支舍,在可意等境界中带来如彼的状态,也就是不被世间法所染污。这位世尊按前面所说的方式开示具初中后三善之法时,所阐明的教法梵行与道梵行,随其相应,因义成就而“有义”,因文成就而“有文”,应当这样连接理解。巴利
Tathāpaṭipannoti yathā samathavipassanāsukhaṃ āvahati, yathā vā satthārā anusiṭṭhaṃ, tathā paṭipanno sāsanadhammo. Tādibhāvāvahanatoti chaḷaṅgupekkhāvasena iṭṭhādīsu tādibhāvassa lokadhammehi anupalepassa āvahanato. Esa bhagavā vuttanayena tividhakalyāṇaṃ dhammaṃ desento yaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ, maggabrahmacariyañca pakāseti, taṃ yathānurūpaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjananti yojanā.
在这里,不加区分地说,有三种修学,以及完整的经教之法,就是教法梵行。针对这一点曾这样说:“尊者,哪些佛陀、世尊的梵行不能久住?”等等(律藏·波罗夷 18)。统摄一切修学的、以三种修学为核心的圣道,就是道梵行。针对这一点曾这样说:“生已尽,梵行已立,所作已办”(大品 23;相应部 5.186)。“随其所应”就是如其所应。因为以三种修学统摄的教法梵行,凭义利成就而具义;至于道梵行,则根本没有什么可说的。“凭义利成就”就是因成就义利。这里“具”这个词就是成就的意思。而另一种(道梵行)则依前面所说的义而具义,并且具文。不过,有人在这里分别说:“词的自性就是具义,义的自性就是具文”,这种说法不好,因为这样分别的教法并不存在。因为音声和意义就像不可分离的特征一样被结合运用。事实上,他们承认这两者有世俗混杂的状态。即使有差异,在“具文”这个词中,如果像“与儿子一起来”等用法那样,意指均等结合,那么“诸比丘,应依义,莫依文”这一重义之说就会受到损害;如果像“有毛、有翼”等用法那样,仅仅指存在,那就不能把握文的成就。因此,应当依照注释书中所说的方式来把握其义。巴利
Tattha avisesena tisso sikkhā, sakalo ca tantidhammo sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘katamesānaṃ kho, bhante, buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ naciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosī’’tiādi (pārā. 18). Sabbasikkhānaṃ maṇḍabhūtasikkhattayasaṅgahito ariyamaggo maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti (mahāva. 23; saṃ. ni. 5.186). Yathānurūpanti yathārahaṃ. Sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ hi sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ. Maggabrahmacariye vattabbameva natthi. Atthasampattiyāti sampannatthatāya. Sampattiattho hi idha saha-saddo. Itaraṃ pana yathāvuttenatthena sātthaṃ, sabyañjanañca. Ye panettha ‘‘vacanasabhāvaṃ sātthaṃ, atthasabhāvaṃ sabyañjana’’nti vibhajitvā vadanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ, tathā vibhattassa pariyattidhammassa abhāvato. Saddatthā hi abhinnarūpā viya hutvā viniyogaṃ gacchanti. Tathā hi nesaṃ lokiyāmissībhāvaṃ paṭijānanti. Satipi vā bhede ‘‘sabyañjana’’nti ettha yadi tulyayogo adhippeto ‘‘saputto āgato’’tiādīsu viya, evaṃ sati ‘‘atthapaṭisaraṇā, bhikkhave, hotha, mā byañjanapaṭisaraṇā’’ti atthappadhānavādo bādhito siyā, atha vijjamānatāmattaṃ ‘‘salomako sapakkhako’’tiādīsu viya byañjanasampatti aggahitā siyā. Tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayeneva attho gahetabbo.
“具义、具文”这句话里,为了也按照导论的理路显示其含义,所以说了“概述……中略……具文”。其中,虽然在导论里是通过文句来把握文与义,因此先列出了“字、词”等文句(导论 4 十二句),但这里因为在圣典中出现了“具义、具文”,所以为了先显示义句,就说了“概述、阐发”等。其中,简要地显示、照亮,就是“概述”,比如“执取的比丘,被魔束缚;不执取的,就得解脱”(相应部 3.64)。仅仅凭这一点,那位比丘就已通达,所以说“世尊已了知”等。最初的显示、照亮,就是“阐发”。这个“示”字用在最初阶段,比如“令知、令安立”等(相应部 2.20)。这两句是针对利根者说的,因为是略说;利根者依据略说和最初所说的义理就能修行。把略说的展开来说,把已说一次的再说一遍,就是“开显、分别”。比如对略说且只说一次的“善法”之义,用“什么是善法?在什么时候有欲界善心”等(法集论 1)来广说,以开显和分别的方式再说一遍。这两句是针对中根者说的,因为是解说。对已开显的再作更广的说明,对已分别的以种种方式让人知道,令所化众生的心欢喜,就是“显了、令知”。比如对已开显分别的“有触”等义,用“那时,什么是触?那时,所有的触、接触、等触”等(法集论 2)来显了和令知。这两句是针对钝根者说的,因为是反复解说。也有这样的读法:“由令知、令安立、开显、分别、显了、阐发之义句的组合。”巴利
Sātthaṃ sabyañjananti ettha nettinayenāpi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkāsana…pe… sabyañjana’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha yadipi nettiyaṃ byañjanamukhena byañjanatthaggahaṇaṃ hotīti ‘‘akkharaṃ pada’’ntiādinā (netti. 4 dvādasapada) byañjanapadāni paṭhamaṃ uddiṭṭhāni, idha pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjana’’nti āgatattā atthapadāniyeva paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkāsanapakāsanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhepato kāsanaṃ dīpanaṃ saṅkāsanaṃ ‘‘maññamāno bhikkhu baddho mārassa, amaññamāno mutto’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.64) viya. Tattakena hi tena bhikkhunā paṭividdhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aññātaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi. Paṭhamaṃ kāsanaṃ pakāsanaṃ. Ādikammasmiṃ hi ayaṃ pasaddo ‘‘paññapeti paṭṭhapetī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.20) viya. Tikkhindriyāpekkhaṃ cetaṃ padadvayaṃ uddesabhāvato. Tikkhindriyo hi saṅkhepato paṭhamañca vuttamatthaṃ paṭipajjati . Saṃkhittassa vitthāravacanaṃ, sakiṃ vuttassa puna vacanañca vivaraṇavibhajanāni. Yathā ‘‘kusalā dhammā’’ti saṅkhepato sakiṃyeva ca vuttassa atthassa ‘‘katame dhammā kusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ citta’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 1) vitthārato vivaraṇavasena, vibhajanavasena ca puna vacanaṃ. Majjhimindriyāpekkhametaṃ padadvayaṃ niddesabhāvato. Vivaṭassa vitthāratarābhidhānaṃ, vibhattassa ca pakārehi ñāpanaṃ veneyyānaṃ cittaparitosanaṃ uttānīkaraṇapaññāpanāni. Yathā ‘‘phasso hotī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 2) vivaṭavibhattassa atthassa ‘‘katamo tasmiṃ samaye phasso? Yo tasmiṃ samaye phasso phusanā samphusanā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 2) uttānīkiriyā, paññāpanā ca. Mudindriyāpekkhametaṃ padadvayaṃ paṭiniddesabhāvato. ‘‘Paññāpanapaṭṭhapanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapakāsanaatthapadasamāyogato’’tipi pāṭho.
这个文本变体又是怎么来的呢?回答说:按照《指导论》巴利圣典里传来的方式,这是原有的经文。因为在那里——巴利
Kathaṃ panāyaṃ pāṭhavikappo jātoti? Vuccate – nettipāḷiyaṃ āgatanayena purimapāṭho. Tattha hi –
解说、阐明,
开显、分别、显明、令知;
通过这六句,
义和业都已经说明了。巴利
‘‘Saṅkāsanā pakāsanā, Vivaraṇā vibhajanuttānīkammapaññatti; Etehi chahi padehi, Attho kammañca niddiṭṭha’’nti. (netti. 4 dvādasapada) –
在教示的摄持中,这个义理也是以“概述、阐发”等说法出现的。而后一句则是依照经中“设定、安立、开显、分别、显明,并说‘你们看’”(相应部2.20)的经文方式,只是文辞上的差别。这样一来,这两种文本的差异就只是文辞上的,而不是义理上的。确实,从简略来说,“最初令知就是设定,最初安立就是安立”这些词句,与概述、阐发这两个词在义理上没有区别。前一种文本中的第六个词“以方式令知”被称为设定,而在后一种文本中则用阐发这个词,说成“无差别地以方式阐发”。因为令知和阐发在照亮义理的自性上是没有差别的,而且一切所化众生心的满足以及智慧的锐利,都因如实照亮事物的自性而生起。如此,由于这是义句的相,教法的义理通过上述六种义句的结合,就成为具有义理的教法。巴利
Desanāhārayojanāya ca etassevatthassa ‘‘saṅkāsanā pakāsanā’’tiādinā āgataṃ. Pacchimo pana ‘‘paññapeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati vibhajati uttānīkaroti ‘passathā’ti cāhā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.20) sutte āgatanayena byañjanamattakato. Evañca nesaṃ dvinnaṃ pāṭhānaṃ viseso, na atthato. Tathā hi saṅkhepato ‘‘paṭhamaṃ ñāpanaṃ paññāpanaṃ, paṭhamameva ṭhapanaṃ paṭṭhapana’’nti imāni padāni saṅkāsanapakāsanapadehi atthato avisiṭṭhāni. Yañca purimapāṭhe chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ ‘‘pakārato ñāpana’’nti paññāpanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ dutiyapāṭhe pakāsanapadena ‘‘nibbisesaṃ pakārato kāsana’’nti katvā. Yasmā ñāpanakāsanāni atthāvabhāsanasabhāvatāya abhinnāni, sabbesañca veneyyānaṃ cittassa tosanaṃ, buddhiyā ca nisānaṃ yāthāvato vatthusabhāvāvabhāsane jāyatīti. Evaṃ atthapadarūpattā pariyattiatthassa yathāvuttachaatthapadasamāyogato sātthaṃ sāsanaṃ.
由字、词、文、行相、辞、解说这些方面的圆满成就:在这里,发音的时候,一个词还没有念完,那个音就是“字”。有些人说,“只有一个字的词就是字”,比如“ā evaṃ kira ta”这类说法里的 ā 等音就是字。另一些人说,“因为清净的行为者以心意和教说的语言而表诠,所以叫字”。有词尾变化、能让人知道意义的,就是“词”。简要地说,词所表达的意义能够显示出来,所以叫“文”,也就是句子。有人说:“动词加上不变词、能作和修饰语,就是句子。”按不同方式分析句子,就是“行相”。行相所表达的是释词,就是“辞”。辞的详细展开,依据无余开示,就是“解说”。由于这些字等文句的圆满、具足,所以叫“具文”。巴利
Akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesasampattiyāti ettha uccāraṇavelāyaṃ apariyosite pade vaṇṇo akkharaṃ. ‘‘Ekakkharaṃ padaṃ akkhara’’nti eke ‘‘ā evaṃ kira ta’’ntiādīsu ā-kārādayo viya. ‘‘Visuddhakaraṇānaṃ manasā desanāvācāya akkharaṇato akkhara’’nti aññe. Vibhattiyantaṃ atthañāpanato padaṃ. Saṅkhepato vuttaṃ padābhihitaṃ atthaṃ byañjetīti byañjanaṃ, vākyaṃ. ‘‘Kiriyāpadaṃ abyayakārakavisesanayuttaṃ vākya’’nti hi vadanti. Pakārato vākyavibhāgo ākāro. Ākārābhihitaṃ nibbacanaṃ nirutti. Nibbacanavitthāro nissesupadesato niddeso. Etesaṃ akkharādīnaṃ byañjanapadānaṃ sampattiyā sampannatāya sabyañjanaṃ.
这里,其义与词句的搭配以及文辞的圆满如下:用字母来标示,用词句来阐明,用文辞来开显,用行相来分析,用词释来说明,用解说来了知;同样,先用字母打开,再用词句引导,这是对“了悟者”的引导;先用文辞详细展开,再用行相引导,这是对“广解者”的引导;先用词释引导,再用解说引导,这是对“可引导者”的引导。这样一来,此法在被打开时引导了悟者,在被详细展开时引导广解者,在被引导时引导可引导者。其中,打开是开头,详细展开是中间,引导是结尾。如此,在三个阶段中以三种方式宣说,能破除三种过失,带来三种功德,调伏三种所化。因此,此法也具有三种善美,因为义与文的圆满,应当知道它是“具义、具文”,以及“圆满、清净”。巴利
Tatrāyamassa atthapadasamāyogo, byañjanasampatti ca – akkharehi saṅkāseti, padehi pakāseti, byañjanehi vivarati, ākārehi vibhajati, niruttīhi uttānīkaroti, niddesehi paññapeti, tathā akkharehi ugghāṭetvā padehi vineti ugghaṭitaññuṃ, byañjanehi vipañcetvā ākārehi vineti vipañcitaññuṃ, niruttīhi netvā niddesehi vineti neyyaṃ. Evañcāyaṃ dhammo ugghaṭiyamāno ugghaṭitaññuṃ vineti, vipañciyamāno vipañcitaññuṃ, niyyamāno neyyaṃ. Tattha ugghaṭanā ādi, vipañcanā majjhe, nayanamante. Evaṃ tīsu kālesu tidhā desito dosattayavidhamano guṇattayāvaho tividhaveneyyavinayanoti. Evampi tividhakalyāṇoyaṃ dhammo atthabyañjanapāripūriyā ‘‘sāttho sabyañjano’’ti veditabbo ‘‘paripuṇṇo, parisuddho’’ti ca.
在“义甚深”等说法中,“义”指的是经教之义。“法”指的是经教。“通达”指的是对经教和经教之义的如实了悟。“开示”指的是以心确定下来的经教之宣说。然而这些义等,因为就像大海对兔子等一样,对钝根之人难以涉入、找不到立足处,所以是甚深的。或者,“义”指的是因与果。“法”指的是因。“开示”指的是施设,即随法而说的法的言说,或者以顺向、逆向、简略、详细等方式的讲述。“通达”指的是现观,即随顺义于法、随顺法于义、随顺施设之道于施设的了悟,或者指那些应当被通达的诸法各自的自相,即不颠倒的体性。这些义等也同样,因为就像大海对兔子等一样,对未积集善根资粮的劣慧者难以涉入、找不到立足处,所以是甚深的。其中,由于通达也依赖于义,所以说“以义甚深与通达甚深而具义”,这是为了显示义的功德。由于那些法的开示依赖于文辞,所以说“以法甚深与开示甚深而具文”,这是为了显示那些文辞的圆满。巴利
Atthagambhīratātiādīsu attho nāma tantiattho. Dhammo tanti. Paṭivedho tantiyā, tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Desanā manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanā. Te panete atthādayo yasmā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāhā, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Atha vā attho nāma hetuphalaṃ. Dhammo hetu. Desanā paññatti, yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpo, anulomapaṭilomasaṅkhepavitthārādivasena vā kathanaṃ. Paṭivedho abhisamayo, atthānurūpaṃ dhammesu, dhammānurūpaṃ atthesu, paññattipathānurūpaṃ paññattīsu avabodho, tesaṃ tesaṃ vā dhammānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo salakkhaṇasaṅkhāto aviparītasabhāvo. Tepi cete atthādayo yasmā anupacitakusalasambhārehi duppaññehi sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo dukkhogāhā, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tesu paṭivedhassāpi atthasannissitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘atthagambhīratāpaṭivedhagambhīratāhi sāttha’’nti atthaguṇadīpanato. Tāsaṃ dhammadesanānaṃ byañjanasannissitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjana’’nti tāsaṃ byañjanasampattidīpanato.
在诸义中,分类而起的智是义辨析。在义、法、辞三种辨析中,分类而起的智是辩辨析。因为这种辨析也以义为对象,所以说“从义辨析与辩辨析的对象来说,是具义的”,因为如果没有义的成就,它就不存在。“法”是指经教。“辞”是指拣择经教中的词句而说。其中,分类而起的诸智是法辨析和辞辨析,所以说“从法辨析与辞辨析的对象来说,是具文的”,因为如果没有文辞的成就,它就不存在。“令审察者生信”这里,iti这个词表示原因。因为能令审察者、寻求什么是善的人产生信心,所以是具义的。义成就,就像由河水涨满推知上游下过雨一样,是从果推因。而它的具义性,因为是智者才能觉知的,所以应当知道它极为深奥、微细、微妙。经中确实这样说过:“深奥、难见……”等等。令世间人生信,所以是具文的;因为能令世间人生信,所以是具文。世间人因为文辞成就而满足,这里也是从果推因。而它的具文性,因为值得信仰,应当知道是初善等性。巴利
Atthesu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā. Atthadhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāti imissāpi paṭisambhidāya atthavisayattā āha ‘‘atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāvisayato sāttha’’nti, atthasampattiyā asati tadabhāvato. Dhammoti tanti . Niruttīti tantipadānaṃ niddhāretvā vacanaṃ. Tattha pabhedagatāni ñāṇāni dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāti āha ‘‘dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāvisayato sabyañjananti, asati byañjanasampattiyā tadabhāvato. Parikkhakajanappasādakanti ettha iti-saddo hetuattho. Yasmā parikkhakajanānaṃ kiṃkusalagavesīnaṃ pasādāvahaṃ, tasmā sātthaṃ. Atthasampannanti phalena hetuno anumānaṃ nadīpūrena viya upari vuṭṭhippavattiyā. Sātthakatā panassa paṇḍitavedanīyatāya, sā paramagambhīrasaṇhasukhumabhāvato veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘gambhīro duddaso’’tiādi (mahāva. 8). Lokiyajanappasādakanti sabyañjananti yasmā lokiyajanassa pasādāvahaṃ, tasmā sabyañjanaṃ. Lokiyajano hi byañjanasampattiyā tussati, idhāpi phalena hetuno anumānaṃ. Sabyañjanatā panassa saddheyyatāya, sā ādikalyāṇādibhāvato veditabbā.
或者,从“智者才能了知”的角度说“具义”,意思是它以慧为立足处,所以义理圆满;因此能让审察的人产生信心。从“值得信仰”的角度说“具文”,意思是它以信为立足处,所以文辞圆满;因此能让世间人产生信心。这里的含义应当这样理解。从“意趣深奥”的角度说“具义”,意思是由于意趣不可测度、没有边际,所以义理圆满;否则就没有这个义。从“文句浅显”的角度说“具文”,意思是由于言辞容易理解,所以文辞圆满;因为即使是最深奥的义理,也能让所教化的众生容易理解。应当知道,这一切都是前面说的两种义的分支,各处注释也是这样解释的。同样,这里不取“分别”或“合集”的意思。所谓“应纳入”,是指应当加入的清净之义,因为没有未说到的缘故。所谓“由全体圆满”,是指由一切部分都圆满。所谓“应去除”,是指杂染之法。巴利
Atha vā paṇḍitavedanīyato sāttha’’nti paññāpadaṭṭhānatāya atthasampannataṃ āha, tato parikkhakajanappasādakaṃ. Saddheyyato sabyañjananti saddhāpadaṭṭhānatāya byañjanasampannataṃ, tato lokiyajanappasādakanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Gambhīrādhippāyato sātthanti adhippāyato agādhāpāratāya atthasampannaṃ aññathā tadabhāvato. Uttānapadato sabyañjananti subodhasaddatāya byañjanasampannaṃ, paramagambhīrassapi atthassa veneyyānaṃ suviññeyyabhāvāpādanato. Sabbopesa paṭhamassa atthadvayassa pabhedo daṭṭhabbo, tathā ceva tattha tattha saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Tathā hettha vikappassa, samuccayassa vā aggahaṇaṃ. Upanetabbassāti pakkhipitabbassa vodānatthassa avuttassa abhāvato. Sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvenāti sabbabhāgehi paripuṇṇatāya. Apanetabbassāti saṃkilesadhammassa.
通过行道,也就是通过戒清净等正确的修行实践,这是它的因。通过证得的明达,也就是因为以谛的现观而有证悟的明达,所以是具义的,不像迦毗罗等虚论那样空虚无义,而是义理圆满。通过教理,也就是通过熟悉教理之法。通过多闻的明达,也就是不像那些在恶说之法中修学的人那样产生迷惑,而是具有多闻的明达,所以是具文的。因为有了文辞的成就,才有多闻的明达。由戒等五法蕴具足,也就是因为不缺戒等五种法蕴。完全圆满,就是无余、周遍、圆满、充满。由无随烦恼,就是因为没有见、慢等随烦恼。为了度脱,就是为了从轮回之苦中出离。由不希求世间利养,就是无论如何都不依止渴爱的依止。巴利
Paṭipattiyāti sīlavisuddhiyādisammāpaṭipattiyā, tannimittaṃ. Adhigamabyattitoti saccapaṭivedhena adhigamaveyyattiyasabbhāvato sātthaṃ kapilavatādi viya tucchaṃ niratthakaṃ ahutvā atthasampannanti katvā. Pariyattiyāti pariyattidhammaparicayena. Āgamabyattitoti durakkhātadhammesu paricayaṃ karontassa viya sammohaṃ ajanetvā bāhusaccaveyyattiyasabbhāvato sabyañcanaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā hi sati āgamabyattīti. Sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhayuttatoti sīlādīhi pañcahi dhammakoṭṭhāsehi avirahitattā. Kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ anavasesena samantato puṇṇaṃ pūritaṃ. Nirupakkilesatoti diṭṭhimānādiupakkilesābhāvato. Nittharaṇatthāyāti vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇāya. Lokāmisanirapekkhatoti kathañcipi taṇhāsannissayassa anissayanato.
世尊用“初善”等说法,依前两种无畏说明了法的善说性之后,现在为了再依后两种无畏显示这一点,就说“或者,因为没有义理的颠倒,所以是善说、善宣告”,然后以反面说明的方式解释这个意思,说了“正如……”等。
其中,“陷入颠倒”是说:在那些法中,因为被称为“障碍法”的果报等并不具有障碍性,因为并不一定成为堕入恶趣的原因。“因为不具有出离性”是说:因为不存在无执著,而且那些被称为“能出离轮回”的法,比如某些外道的祭祀仪式、凡夫的知识等,因为并不具有从轮回中出离的性质,所以反而是颠倒的。“因此”是说:因为对义理产生了颠倒。那些外道。“因为不超越其本来状态”是说:业障等五种障碍的障碍性,以及圣道诸法的出离性,任何时候都不会被超越。巴利
Evaṃ ādikalyāṇatādiapadesena satthu purimavesārajjadvayavasena dhammassa svākkhātataṃ vibhāvetvā idāni pacchimavesārajjadvayavasenāpi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atthavipallāsābhāvato vā suṭṭhu akkhātoti svākkhāto’’ti vatvā tamatthaṃ byatirekamukhena vibhāvento ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha vipallāsamāpajjatīti tesaṃ dhamme ‘‘antarāyikā’’ti vuttadhammānaṃ vipākādīnaṃ antarāyikattābhāvato ekaṃsena apāyūpapattihetutāya abhāvato. Niyyānikattābhāvatoti atammayatābhāvato, saṃsārato ca niyyānikāti vuttadhammānaṃ ekaccayaññakiriyāpakatipurisantaraññāṇādīnaṃ tato niyyānikattābhāvato viparīto eva hoti. Tenāti atthassa vipallāsāpajjanena. Te aññatitthiyā. Tathābhāvānatikkamanatoti kammantarāyādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ antarāyikabhāvassa ariyamaggadhammānaṃ niyyānikabhāvassa kadācipi anativattanato.
与涅槃相应的修行:因为世尊宣说了与应当证得的、远离一切有为法的涅槃相应的修行,这种修行是出离一切有为法的方便,并且带有前行阶段,所以这样连接。与行道相应的(涅槃):与那样的行道相应的涅槃,该行道能引导出离一切苦,仅仅以作为所缘的方式,烦恼就无法染污它。善施设:由戒等三蕴所摄,以正见等为分类,通过断除邪见等而妥善、正确地安立。相合:因为烦恼垢得以清净而相合。如此,通过道与涅槃在行道和所行方面彼此相应,显示了善说性之后,现在为了分别显示三种出世间法各自的善说性,而说“其中,圣道……”等。其中,二边指:常见与断见,沉湎欲乐与自我折磨,昏沉与掉举,住著与策进——这样分类的二边。不趋近:即不趋近,或者是不趋近的原因。已止息的烦恼:即已妥善寂止的烦恼,以寂止断除的方式,正确地断除了过失。依于常等自性:即依于在各部经中赞叹常等自性的方式,如“比丘们,我将为你们宣说常法、不死法、庇护法、皈依处法”等。巴利
Nibbānānurūpāya paṭipattiyāti adhigantabbassa sabbasaṅkhatavinissaṭassa nibbānassa anurūpāya sabbasaṅkhāranissaraṇūpāyabhūtāya sapubbabhāgāya sammāpaṭipattiyā akkhātattāti yojanā. Paṭipadānurūpassāti sabbadukkhaniyyānikabhūtā ārammaṇakaraṇamattenāpi kilesehi anāmasanīyā yādisī paṭipadā, tadanurūpassa. Supaññattāti sīlādikkhandhattayasaṅgahitā sammādiṭṭhiādippabhedā micchādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ pahāyikabhāvena suṭṭhu sammadeva vihitā. Saṃsandati kilesamalavisuddhitāya sameti. Evaṃ magganibbānānaṃ paṭipadāpaṭipajjanīyabhāvehi aññamaññānurūpatāya svākkhātataṃ dassetvā idāni tividhassāpi lokuttaradhammassa paccekaṃ svākkhātataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ariyamaggo cetthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha antadvayanti sassatucchedaṃ, kāmasukhaattakilamathānuyogaṃ, līnuddhaccaṃ, patiṭṭhānāyūhananti evaṃ pabhedaṃ antadvayaṃ. Anupagammāti anupagantvā, anupagamanahetu vā. Paṭipassaddhakilesānīti suṭṭhu vūpasantakilesāni, paṭipassaddhippahānavasena sammadeva pahīnadosāni. Sassatādisabhāvavasenāti ‘‘sassatañca vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi amatañca tāṇañca leṇañcā’’tiādinā tesu tesu suttesu sassatādibhāvakittanavasena.
148 用“断除贪等之后,圣者应当亲自见到”这句话,就是在说:“我的贪等已经被圣道断除了”,这是由自己、不需要靠别人引导而见,所以叫“现见”;现见本身就是“现见性”。巴利
148.‘‘Rāgādīnaṃ abhāvaṃ karontena ariyapuggalena sāmaṃ daṭṭhabbo’’ti iminā ‘‘ariyamaggena mama rāgādayo pahīnā’’ti sayaṃ attanā anaññaneyyena daṭṭhabboti sandiṭṭhi, sandiṭṭhi eva sandiṭṭhiko.
圣弟子不再依靠他人的信仰、他人的信奉、由他人引导而行的状态,也不再需要别人来告知,而是以省察智作为自己的工具。被称赞的见就是现见,如同正觉支一样。圣道依靠与自己相应的现见来战胜烦恼;圣果也是依靠那作为自身之因的现见来战胜烦恼;涅槃则是依靠作为所缘、成为自身境域的现见来战胜烦恼。这就是句子的连接方式。巴利
Tenatena ariyasāvakena parasaddhāya parassa saddahanena paraneyyena gantabbataṃ hitvā ñāpetabbataṃ pahāya paccavekkhaṇañāṇena karaṇabhūtena. Pasatthā diṭṭhi sandiṭṭhi yathā sambojjhaṅgo. Ariyamaggo attanā sampayuttāya sandiṭṭhiyā kilese jayati, ariyaphalaṃ tāya eva attano kāraṇabhūtāya, nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇena attano visayībhūtāya sandiṭṭhiyā kilese jayatīti yojanā.
从修习现观的角度来说,是道法。从作证现观的角度来说,是涅槃法。而下位果,因为它是一来观等的缘,又因为它是上位道证得的亲依止缘,所以间接地说,它可以得到“被现见则遮止轮回怖畏”这样的说法。巴利
Bhāvanābhisamayavasena maggadhammo. Sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nibbānadhammo. Phalampi heṭṭhimaṃ sakadāgāmivipassanādīnaṃ paccayabhāvena upari maggādhigamassa upanissayabhāvato pariyāyato ‘‘dissamāno vaṭṭabhayaṃ nivattetī’’ti vattabbataṃ labhati.
149 无时的意思是:它没有需要等待的时间。比如世间善法在给果报时,有一个需要等待的时间,像下一生或再下一生等等,但此者不是这样,这就是它的含义。因此说不是五天后等等。远是指遥远。对于给果报来说,时间很远,所以叫有待时的,也就是要经过一段时间才给果报。因此说在给予其自身果报方面。已到达是指已被带来。这指的就是无时这个词。巴利
149.Nāssakāloti nāssa āgametabbo kālo atthi. Yathā hi lokiyakusalassa ‘‘upapajje, aparapariyāye’’tiādinā phaladānaṃ pati āgametabbo kālo atthi, na evametassāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘na pañcāhā’’tiādi. Pakaṭṭhoti dūro. Phaladānaṃ pati kālo pakaṭṭho assāti kāliko, kālantaraphaladāyī. Tenāha ‘‘attano phaladāne’’ti. Pattoti upanīto. Idanti ‘‘akāliko’’ti padaṃ.
150 “方式”是指安排、规定,也就是“来,看!”这样说出的一种规定用语。“由于存在”是指从究竟真实的角度来说是可以得到的。“由于清净”是指因为远离了烦恼污垢而彻底清净。即使是不讨人喜欢的东西,有时也会为了某种目的,通过揭示它本来的样子来加以说明;为了说明并不存在这种情况,所以说“通过揭示令人喜欢的状态”。巴利
150.Vidhinti vidhānaṃ, ‘‘ehi passā’’ti evaṃpavattavidhivacanaṃ. Vijjamānattāti paramatthato upalabbhamānattā. Parisuddhattāti kilesamalavirahena sabbathā visuddhattā. Amanuññampi kadāci payojanavasena yathāsabhāvappakāsanena dassetabbaṃ bhaveyyāti tadabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘manuññabhāvappakāsanenā’’ti.
151 “应被引导近前”就是可被引导的,而它本身就是“可引导近前的”。因为要表达的就是这个意思,所以说“应被引导近前者,就是可引导近前的”。把法引导到心中生起,所以说“这适用于有为的出世间法”。不过,如果把“引导到心中”理解为把作为所缘的法带到所缘的状态,那么它也适用于无为法,也就是“值得进行名为‘作为所缘’的引导,所以是可引导近前的”。“附着”就是接触。意思是:涅槃把圣者引导近前。巴利
151. Upanetabboti upaneyyo, upaneyyova opaneyyikoti imassa atthassa adhippetattā āha ‘‘upanetabboti opaneyyiko’’ti. Citte upanayanaṃ uppādananti āha ‘‘idaṃ saṅkhate lokuttaradhamme yujjatī’’ti. Citte upanayananti pana ārammaṇabhūtassa dhammassa ārammaṇabhāvūpanayane adhippete asaṅkhatepi yujjeyya ‘‘ārammaṇakaraṇasaṅkhātaṃ upanayanaṃ arahatīti opaneyyiko’’ti. Allīyananti phusanaṃ. Nibbānaṃ upaneti ariyapuggalanti adhippāyo.
152 “由智者们”就是指由明智者,也就是已通达真理的人,这是它的意思。而他们一定是顿悟者等一类人,所以说“由顿悟者等”。“各自的”这个词,应该按处格的意义理解为“pati attani(各于自己)”,所以说“attani attani(于自己、于自己)”。“应被了知”已经说了,那要怎么去了知呢?所以说“我已修习……”等。其中,用“我”这个字把“各自的”这个词所表达的意思从随行(正向)方面显示出来之后,为了再从违逆(反面)方面显示,又说了“因为不是……”等,这很容易理解。为了显示“由智者们”这个词含有简别的意思,所以说“然而,这不是愚者们的境界”。巴利
152.Viññūhīti vidūhi, paṭividdhasaccehīti attho. Te pana ekaṃsato ugghaṭitaññūādayo hontīti āha ‘‘ugghaṭitaññūādīhī’’ti. ‘‘Paccatta’’nti etassa ‘‘pati attanī’’ti bhummavasena attho gahetabboti āha ‘‘attani attanī’’ti. Veditabboti vuttaṃ, kathaṃ veditabboti āha ‘‘bhāvito me’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘me’’ti iminā ‘‘paccatta’’nti padena vuttamatthaṃ anvayato dassetvā puna byatirekena dassetuṃ ‘‘na hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva. ‘‘Viññūhī’’ti idaṃ antogadhāvadhāraṇanti dassento ‘‘bālānaṃ pana avisayo cesā’’ti āha.
像这样,先用“初善”等说法说明教法前后彼此相应,从而显示法的善说性;现在为了说明后后句是前前句的理由,就说出“而且”等话。其中,“现见的”是说:因为按照上面所说的方式,这个法是可以亲自见到的,它以亲见摧毁烦恼,也值得让人看见,所以是善说的;外道的恶说之法因为没有这一点,所以不是善说。按照这个道理,其余各句也应当随其相应之处了知其义。巴利
Evaṃ ādikalyāṇatādinā aññamaññassa anurūpadesanāya dhammassa svākkhātataṃ dassetvā idāni purimassa purimassa pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ padaṃ kāraṇavacananti dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sandiṭṭhikattāti yasmā ayaṃ dhammo vuttanayena sāmaṃ daṭṭhabbo, sandiṭṭhiyā kilese viddhaṃseti, sandassanañca arahati, tasmā svākkhāto durakkhāte titthiyadhamme tadabhāvato. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi yathārahaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo.
153 在“彼之”等语句中,应当说的内容,要依照佛随念中所说的方式来理解。巴利
153.Tassevantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ buddhānussatiyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
3. 随念僧伽论的注释巴利
3. Saṅghānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
154 圣僧团的功德:因为远离烦恼,因为不走邪道而走正道,又因为被包括天人在内的世间当作皈依处,所以既神圣又是僧团;或者说,是圣者们组成的僧团,就是圣僧团。这些就是它的功德。巴利
154.Ariyasaṅghaguṇāti ārakattā kilesehi, anaye na iriyanato, aye ca iriyanato, sadevakena ca lokena ‘‘saraṇa’’nti araṇīyato ariyo ca so saṅgho ca, ariyānaṃ vā saṅgho ariyasaṅgho, tassa guṇā.
155 155. 对于正确行道的人,被称为“善行道”。那圣道的行道,通过断除敌对之法而使其成为不退转之法;由于无需再作功用,它自身也是不退转之法;并且对于应当证得的涅槃,它一向随顺。正因如此,它是不违逆的,是随法之法。为了说明正因为行于那行道,圣僧团才被称为“善行道”,所以说“善行道”等。其中,以“不退转行道”显示正直的行道,因为如果一再退转,就不是正直的行道。以“随顺行道、不违逆行道”显示如理行道,因为它随顺应证得的涅槃,且不违逆,所以是如理的。以“法随法行道”显示正当行道,因为它表明了随顺合宜的状态。由此显示,其余三句是对第一句的展开解释。因此说“然而因为”等。巴利
155. Yaṃ sammāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno ‘‘suṭṭhu paṭipanno’’ti vuccati. Sā ariyamaggapaṭipadā paṭipakkhadhamme anivattidhamme katvā pajahanato payojanābhāvā sayampi anivattidhammā, adhigantabbassa ca nibbānassa ekaṃsato anulomīti. Tato eva apaccanīkā, anudhammabhūtā ca, tassā ca paṭipannattā ariyasaṅgho ‘‘suppaṭipanno’’ti vuttoti dassetuṃ ‘‘suṭṭhu paṭipanno’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘anivattipaṭipada’’nti iminā ujuppaṭipattiṃ dasseti. Punappunaṃ nivattane hi sati ujuppaṭipatti na hoti. ‘‘Anulomapaṭipadaṃ apaccanīkapaṭipada’’nti iminā ñāyappaṭipattiṃ. Paṭipajjitabbassa hi nibbānassa anulomanena, apaccanīkatāya cassā ñāyato. ‘‘Dhammānudhammapaṭipada’’nti iminā sāmīcippaṭipattiṃ anucchavikabhāvadīpanato. Etena paṭhamapadassa papañcaniddeso, itarāni tīṇi padānīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi.
按照教导去实践,因为这样能成就应做的事,所以能带来圣者身份的听闻,就叫作恭敬听闻。因此说“恭敬听闻的人就是弟子”,这是要表明:只有圣者才是从根本上说的导师弟子。戒与见的共同性,是指以圣戒和圣见而具有同等性。因为圣者们的戒与见,就像中间切断的黄金一样没有差别,这是由于它们都来自圣道的缘故。因此,他们无论站在哪里,都是和合一致的。所以他说“已进入和合的状态”。通过断除谄曲、欺骗等恶法而正直。正因为如此,没有像牛尿那样的弯曲,所以不弯。没有像新月那样的弯曲,所以不曲。没有像犁头那样的弯曲,所以不歪。或者,以不弯等的状态而正直。以清净之义而为圣。以无过失的状态,能知、能走向涅槃,或者依此而知、而证悟涅槃,所以是如理。因为适合出离轮回之苦。因为随顺、适合,所以正当的行道也被称为“正当的”“合宜的”。由于具备这些,所以是善行道,即“正确地行道”。因为这里的“行道”一词是现在时含义,就像“为证得入流果而行道者”那样。过去行道,指的是前面所说的道之正行道。通过这两者,或者以共通说明的方式,或者以“善行道、善行道、善行道”这样省略的方式,显示所包含的众人被称为“善行道”。巴利
Yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjanena kiccasiddhito ariyabhāvāvahaṃ savanaṃ sakkaccasavanaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sakkaccaṃ suṇantīti sāvakā’’ti, tena ariyā eva nippariyāyato satthu sāvakā nāmāti dasseti. Sīladiṭṭhisāmaññatāyāti ariyena sīlena, ariyāya ca diṭṭhiyā samānabhāvena. Ariyānañhi sīladiṭṭhiyo majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya ninnānākaraṇaṃ maggenāgatattā. Tena te yattha katthaci ṭhitāpi saṃhatāva. Tenāha ‘‘saṅghātabhāvamāpanno’’ti. Māyāsāṭheyyādipāpadhammasamucchedena uju. Tato eva gomuttavaṅkābhāvena avaṅkā. Candalekhāvaṅkābhāvena akuṭilā. Naṅgalakoṭivaṅkābhāvena ajimhā. Avaṅkādibhāvena vā uju. Parisuddhaṭṭhena ariyā. Apaṇṇakabhāvena ñāyati kamati nibbānaṃ, taṃ vā ñāyati paṭivijjhīyati etenāti ñāyo. Vaṭṭadukkhaniyyānāya anucchavikattā. Anurūpattā sāmīci opāyikātipi saṅkhaṃ samaññaṃ gatā sammāpaṭipatti, tāya samaṅgitāya suppaṭipannā ‘‘sammā paṭipajjantī’’ti katvā. Vattamānattho hi ayaṃ paṭipanna-saddo yathā ‘‘sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno’’ti (pu. pa. 206). Atītaṃ paṭipadanti yathāvuttamaggasammāpaṭipattiṃ vadati. Ubhayena ca sāmaññaniddesena, ‘‘suppaṭipannā ca suppaṭipannā ca suppaṭipannā’’ti ekasesanayena vā gahitānaṃ samūho ‘‘suppaṭipanno’’ti vuttoti dasseti.
像这样,先以解释开头这个词含义的方式,说明了其余几个词的含义;现在为了展示四个词各自不相混杂的含义,又说了“而且”等话。其中,“依所教”是指依照导师所教导的那样,也就是与教诫相符合的意思。“无过失行道”是指不会偏离、没有过错的行道,也就是无可指责的修行。这里应当这样连接:因为在善说的法与律中,他们行于无过失的行道。如果和第一个词连接,那第二个词不就不该说了吗?如果和第二个词连接,那第一个词不也就不该说了吗?并非如此,因为第一个词正是它所期待的前提。为了显示弟子的无过失行道就是依所教而行,所以应当说“因为依所教而行”。或者,因为这两者都能成立善行的状态,所以两者都说了。因为“且”这个字正是把两者一并统摄起来。巴利
Evaṃ ādipadatthaniddesabhāvena itarapadānaṃ atthaṃ vatvā idāni catunnampi padānaṃ avomissakaṃ atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathānusiṭṭhanti satthārā yathā anusiṭṭhaṃ, tathā anusāsanīanurūpanti attho. Apaṇṇakapaṭipadanti avirajjhanakapaṭipadaṃ, anavajjapaṭipattinti attho. Ettha ca svākkhāte dhammavinaye apaṇṇakapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannattāti evaṃ sambandhitabbaṃ. Purimapadena sambandhe dutiyapadaṃ na vattabbaṃ siyā, nanu ca dutiyapadena sambandhepi paṭhamaṃ padaṃ na vattabbaṃ siyāti? Na tassa paṭhamaṃ apekkhitattā. Sā pana sāvakānaṃ apaṇṇakapaṭipadā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipadāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipannattā’’ti vattabbaṃ . Ubhayassāpi vā suppaṭipannabhāvasādhanattā ubhayaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā hi pi-saddena ubhayaṃ samuccinoti.
因为烦恼的歪曲而执取两个极端,彻底断除它之后,能断除身等歪曲的正道,就是正直的修行。所以说“以中道……正直而行”。巴利
Kilesajimhavasena antadvayagāhoti sabbaso taṃ pahāya sammāpaṭipadā kāyādivaṅkappahāyinī ujuppaṭipatti hotīti āha ‘‘majjhimāya paṭipadāya…pe… ujuppaṭipanno’’ti.
所谓“如理”,是指契合、通达的修行实践,也是涅槃。因为即使衣燃、头燃,也应当不顾一切地继续修行——为了寂止一切诸行。所以说“如理即是涅槃”。这里应当理解,涅槃是从“寂灭作用”这个角度来说的;或者说,通过道智等而了知、证悟、亲证,因此涅槃即是如理。这里的含义应当这样理解。巴利
Ñāyo nāma yuttappattapaṭipatti, nibbānañca, sabbasaṅkhārasamathatāya ādittaṃ celaṃ, sīsaṃ vā ajjhupekkhitvāpi paṭipajjitabbamevāti āha ‘‘ñāyo vuccati nibbāna’’nti. Nibbāyanakiriyāmukhena cettha nibbānaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ , maggañāṇādīhi vā ñāyati paṭivijjhīyati sacchikarīyati cāti ñāyo nibbānanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
他人出于对功德的尊崇而做的承事、礼敬等正当行为,他堪受得起,所以叫堪受正当行为者。巴利
Guṇasambhāvanāya parehi kayiramānaṃ paccupaṭṭhānādisāmīcikammaṃ arahantīti sāmīcikammārahā.
156 “Yadidaṃ”这个不变词含有性、数、格的差别,所以根据它的词形变化来说明含义,即“yā imāni”。“Evaṃ”是表示方式的不变词,意思是“以这种方式”。由此显示出其余三对,所以说“如此有四种人双对”。“Etaṃ”指以复数形式说出的“purisapuggalā”这个词。既是人又是士夫,所以叫“人、士夫”。这里,“purisā”是按第一类本性来把握,“puggalā”则是按第二类,以有情的共通性来把握;或者,这里的含义应当这样理解。是哪四种资具呢?从“应取来供祭”这一总说来看,这个意思已经很明显。或者,“dātabbaṃ”这个单数主格词,应当参照“catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ”这个词,转为属格来理解,否则任何四种资具都可能被称为“āhuna”。“Āhunaṃ arahati”就是应受供养,即“āhuneyyo”。或者,对帝释天等也有“āhavana”,即由帝释天等所施的布施。“Yattha hutaṃ mahapphalaṃ”意思是:在哪个应供养火中,所供的酪等,比起在应供养火、家主火、应施火中所供的,果报更大,这是那些婆罗门的见解。“Hutaṃ”就是所施之物。“Nikāyantare”指一切有论者的部派。巴利
156.Yadidanti antogadhaliṅgavacanabhedo nipātoti tassa vacanabhedena atthamāha ‘‘yā imānī’’ti. Evanti pakāratthe nipāto, iminā pakārenāti attho. Tena itarāni tīṇi yugaḷāni dassitāni hontīti āha ‘‘evaṃ cattāri purisayugaḷāni hontī’’ti. Etanti etaṃ ‘‘purisapuggalā’’ti bahuvacanavasena vuttaṃ padaṃ. Purisā ca te puggalā ca purisapuggalā. Tattha ‘‘purisā’’ti iminā paṭhamāya pakatiyā gahaṇaṃ, ‘‘puggalā’’ti pana dutiyāyapi sattasāmaññenāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ kīdisānaṃ? Ānetvā hunitabbānanti adhikārato pākaṭoyamattho. Dātabbanti vā paccattavacanaṃ ‘‘catunnaṃ paccayāna’’nti padaṃ apekkhitvā sāmivasena pariṇāmetabbaṃ, aññathā yesaṃ kesañci catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ ‘‘āhuna’’nti samaññā siyā. Āhunaṃ arahatīti vā āhuneyyo. Sakkādīnampi vā āhavananti sakkādīhipi diyyamānaṃ dānaṃ. Yattha hutaṃ mahapphalanti yasmiṃ āvahanīyaggimhi hutaṃ dadhiādi āhuneyyaggigahapataggidakkhiṇeyyaggīsu hutato uḷāraphalanti tesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ laddhi. Hutanti dinnaṃ. Nikāyantareti sabbatthikavādinikāye.
除去那些可爱的亲友,不布施给他们,这就是这段话的意思。就是这个道理。所谓“在一佛之间也能见到”,意思是经过一佛的间隔就能见到。用“ca”这个字,是要说明有时即使经过无数劫也会出现。“不混杂”是指不被对立的东西掺杂,这也是对行为方式的限定。所谓能产生可爱、可意之法的,就是戒等,这些在圣僧团中已经很好地建立起来了。这里的意思是:亲友离别之后不久就会再相聚,他们对彼此的那种可爱可意并不稳定,圣僧团却不是。因此僧团才是应受供客物者。Pubbakāra是指上首的作为。Sabbappakārena的意思是以一切方式,即以尊重、恭敬、崇敬等,以及以对施物恭敬而行施等一切方式。这pāhavanīya一词作为同义词被称为pāhuneyyo。巴利
Ṭhapetvā 165 teti te piyamanāpe ñātimitte apanetvā, tesaṃ adatvāti adhippāyo. Esa eso. Ekabuddhantare ca dissatīti ekasmiṃ buddhantare vītivatte dissati. Ca-saddena kadāci asaṅkhyeyyepi kappe vītivatteti dasseti. Abbokiṇṇanti paṭipakkhehi avomissaṃ, kiriyāvisesakañcetaṃ. Piyamanāpattakaradhammā nāma sīlādayo, te ariyasaṅghe suppatiṭṭhitā. Ayaṃ hettha adhippāyo – ñātimittā vippayuttā na cirasseva samāgacchanti, anavaṭṭhitā ca tesu piyamanāpatā, na evamariyasaṅgho. Tasmā saṅghova pāhuneyyoti. Pubbakāranti aggakiriyaṃ. Sabbappakārenāti ādaragāravabahumānādinā, deyyadhammassa sakkaccakaraṇādinā ca sabbena pakārena. Svāyaṃ pāhavanīya-saddo ‘‘pāhuneyyo’’ti vuccati pariyāyabhāvena.
众生通过它,随着自己所愿的成就而增长,所以叫“dakkhiṇā”(布施)。因为能造成这样的状态,所以值得接受布施。就像因为获得广大、极多、殊胜的利益而被称为清净一样,布施也因为具有广大的果报,所以说“以能产生广大果报而清净”。巴利
Dakkhanti etāya sattā yathādhippetāhi sampattīhi vaḍḍhantīti dakkhiṇā. Tathābhāvakaraṇena dakkhiṇaṃ arahati. Yathā uḷārātivipuludrayalābhena visodhitaṃ nāma hoti, evaṃ dakkhiṇā vipulaphalatāyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahapphalakaraṇatāya visodhetī’’ti.
想求功德的人应当在这里合掌,所以叫“应合掌的地方”。巴利
Puññatthikehi añjali karaṇīyā etthāti añjalikaraṇīyo.
即使圣典里说的是“无上”,它的意思也是:没有比这更高、更殊胜的,所以叫“无上”。接着为了说明也没有和它相等的,就说“无比”。田以让撒下的种子结出大果的方式保护、守护它;或者,人们在那里撒种、下种,所以叫“田”,比如水田等。就像田一样,它是福德的田,所以叫“福田”。其余部分应按照随念佛陀中已说的方法来理解。巴利
Yadipi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘anuttara’’nti vuttaṃ. Natthi ito uttaraṃ visiṭṭhanti hi anuttaraṃ. Samampissa pana natthīti dassento ‘‘asadisa’’nti āha. Khittaṃ vuttaṃ bījaṃ mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena tāyati rakkhati, khipanti vapanti ettha bījānīti vā khettaṃ, kedārādi, khettaṃ viya khettaṃ, puññānaṃ khettaṃ puññakkhettaṃ. Sesaṃ buddhānussatiyaṃ vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ.
4. 戒随念说的注释巴利
4. Sīlānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
158 158. “啊,真是稀有,这些戒没有破损!啊,真是稀有,这些戒没有裂痕!”——应当在一切地方都这样套用。“啊,真是稀有”是表示赞叹的语气词。因此说“以无破损等功德”,意思就是“以成就无破损等功德”。随念他人的戒时,由于能带来可爱、可意之性,它只是慈心的依托处,而不是单独的业处,所以说“应当随念自己的戒”。在布施等方面,也是同样的道理。巴利
158. Aho vata sīlāni akhaṇḍāni, aho vata acchiddānīti evaṃ sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Aho vatāti ca sambhāvane nipāto. Tenāha ‘‘akhaṇḍatādiguṇavasenā’’ti. Akhaṇḍabhāvādisampattivasenāti attho. Parassa sīlāni anussariyamānāni piyamanāpabhāvāvahanena kevalaṃ mettāya padaṭṭhānaṃ honti, na visuṃ kammaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘attano sīlāni anussaritabbānī’’ti. Cāgādīsupi eseva nayo.
“Yesaṃ”指的是戒等。如果按顺序受持,就按受持的顺序;如果一时总受,就按说示的顺序,由此应知戒的始末。好比在边缘或末端割破衣服,这是一个不恰当的譬喻;其余譬喻也是如此。以穿透方式割破的衣服,就是被穿透割裂的衣服。好比不同颜色的母牛,这是关联。没有杂色的,或者说“asabalāni”;同样地,“akammāsāni”。七种淫欲的结合,在前面关于戒的论说中已经讲过。以“忿、恨等”,“等”字包含了覆、恼、嫉、悭、诳、谄、慢、过慢等。那些正是具有无破等功德的戒。戒从渴爱的奴役中解脱出来,就是成就了通向解脱的依止。正因为如此,具足戒的人就成为自主、自在、解脱者,所以说“以成就解脱而称为‘bhujissāni’”。像“以此戒,我或成为天人,或成为某位天人,在那里是常、恒、永久的”,“以戒得清净”这类说法,由于不被渴爱和邪见所执取,因此以“这是你戒中的过失”等(指责之辞),以及以四种失败中任何一种失败的显现,都不能执取、攻击(他)。能引生定的,就是“samādhisaṃvattanikāni”。巴利
Yesanti sīlādīnaṃ. Paṭipāṭiyā samādāne samādānakkamena, ekajjhaṃ samādāne uddesakkamena sīlānaṃ ādiantaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pariyante chinnasāṭako viyāti vatthante, dasante vā chinnavatthaṃ viya, visadisūdāharaṇaṃ cetaṃ. Evaṃ sesānipi udāharaṇāni. Vinivedhavasena chinnasāṭako vinividdhasāṭako. Visabhāgavaṇṇena gāvī viyāti sambandho. Sabalarahitāni vā asabalāni. Tathā akammāsāni. Sattavidhamethunasaṃyogo heṭṭhā sīlakathāyaṃ vutto eva. Kodhūpanāhādīhīti ādi-saddena makkhapaḷāsaissāmacchariyamāyāsāṭheyyamānātimānādayo gahitā. Tāniyeva akhaṇḍādiguṇāni sīlāni. Sīlassa taṇhādāsabyato mocanaṃ vivaṭṭūpanissayabhāvāpādanaṃ. Tato eva taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo serī sayaṃvasī bhujisso nāma hoti. Tenāha ‘‘bhujissabhāvakaraṇena bhujissānī’’ti. ‘‘Imināhaṃ sīlena devo vā bhaveyyaṃ devaññataro vā, tattha nicco dhuvo sassato’’ti, ‘‘sīlena suddhī’’ti ca evamādinā taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattā ayaṃ te sīlesu dosoti catūsu vipattīsu yāya kāyaci vipattiyā dassanena parāmaṭṭhuṃ anuddhaṃsetuṃ. Samādhisaṃvattanappayojanāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni.
159 对学处有恭敬:因为依靠戒财而得到受持,所以对学处格外恭敬、顺从。与同分者共住:就是与具足戒的人共住,或者就是以此学处而有同分之行。一个人如果没有对学处的恭敬,由于相违,他就成了与学处不同住的人。就像和别人相处时自己不留隔阂一样,以法和财来待人接物,就是款待。正因为对学处有恭敬,所以在这方面不放逸。自谴的恐惧、他谴的恐惧、刑罚的恐惧、恶趣的恐惧等,这些恐惧都已被远远抛开,所以说离自谴等恐惧。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
159.Sikkhāya sagāravoti sīladhanaṃ nissāya paṭiladdhasamādānattā sātisayaṃ sikkhāya sagāravo sappatisso hoti. Sabhāgavuttīti sampannasīlehi sabhāgavuttiko, tāya eva vā sikkhāya sabhāgavutti. Yo hi sikkhāgāravarahito, so tāya visabhāgavutti nāma hoti vilomanato. Yathā parehi saddhiṃ attano chiddaṃ na hoti, evaṃ dhammāmisehi paṭisantharaṇaṃ paṭisanthāro. Sikkhāya sagāravattā eva tattha appamatto hoti. Attānuvādabhayaṃ parānuvādabhayaṃ daṇḍabhayaṃ duggatibhayanti evamādīni bhayāni imassa dūrasamussāritānīti āha ‘‘attānuvādādibhayavirahito’’ti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
5. 布施随念论的注释巴利
5. Cāgānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
160 “本性”就是指它自己的性质。“以舍为志向”是指在应当布施之物的舍离上投入、致力于此,并且倾向它、朝向它。恒常、时时都在进行布施分享的人,就是具有恒常不断布施分享的人,这里说的就是这种人。这里也要把“本性”引过来搭配理解。为别人准备好而给出去,那就是布施。把自己本来该享用的东西分出来共享,那就是分享。“从今以后”就是从这时起、从今天开始、以今日为起点。立下“不先布施就不吃”的布施誓愿。在那一天,就是在开始修习的那一天。在那里取相,就是在那个布施中,通过观察舍离思心所生起的方式而取相。依远离垢与悭吝等功德,就是由于远离了垢与悭吝,所以是舍离;那种状态就是远离垢与悭吝性。这是依这些功德、成就或利益来说的。巴利
160.Pakatiyāti sabhāvena. Cāgādhimuttenāti deyyadhammapariccāge yuttappayuttena tanninnena tappoṇena. Niccaṃ sadā pavattā dānasaṃvibhāgā yassa so niccapavattadānasaṃvibhāgo, tena. Idhāpi ‘‘pakatiyā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Yaṃ parassa paṭiyattaṃ diyyati, taṃ dānaṃ. Yaṃ attanā paribhuñjitabbato saṃvibhajati, so saṃvibhāgo. Ito dāni pabhutīti ito paṭṭhāya dāni ajjatagge ajjadivasaṃ ādiṃ katvā. Adatvā na bhuñjissāmīti dānasamādānaṃ katvā . Taṃdivasanti tasmiṃ bhāvanārambhadivase. Tattha nimittaṃ gaṇhitvāti tasmiṃ dāne pariccāgacetanāya pavattiākārassa sallakkhaṇavasena nimittaṃ gahetvā. Vigatamalamaccheratādiguṇavasenāti vigatāni malamaccherāni etasmāti vigatamalamacchero, cāgo, tassa bhāvo vigatamalamaccheratā. Tadādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ, sampattīnaṃ, ānisaṃsānaṃ vā vasena.
随顺善士之法,就是依次随顺、进入诸善士和菩萨的法脉传承,或者不偏离。这些是施主所得到的利益:寿命、容貌、快乐、力量、辩才等,以及可爱之相等,都是世尊所称赞、宣说的。“或为人身”中的“或”字表示没有说出来的其他可能,由此应当知道,这也包含了根力敏锐、业自作智等。巴利
Sataṃdhammaṃ anukkamanti sādhūnaṃ bodhisattānaṃ dhammaṃ paveṇiṃ anu anu kamanto okkamanto, avokkamanto vā. Ye ime dāyakassa lābhā āyuvaṇṇasukhabalapaṭibhānādayo, piyabhāvādayo ca bhagavatā saṃvaṇṇitā pakittitā. Manussattaṃ vāti vā-saddo avuttavikappattho, tena indriyapāṭavabhāvakammassakatāñāṇādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
以悭吝之垢:就是以被称为悭吝的垢染。或者也可以说,悭吝与垢染合起来叫“悭吝之垢”,意思是以悭吝以及贪等垢染。依各自投生:就是依各自所造之业而投生。黑法:指贪等一向黑暗的恶法。已远离:就是已经断除。以远离垢悭之心:这里的具格用法是表示“如此状态”的特征。对于住在家中的入流者:就是虽然住在家中却已证得入流的人。依止而住:指应当依止而住的住处,意思是每天都要运用的业处。克服:就是克服住家者心中生起的贪等随烦恼。巴利
Maccheramalenāti maccherasaṅkhātena malena. Atha vā maccherañca malañca maccheramalaṃ, tena maccherena ceva lobhādimalena cāti attho. Pajāyanavasenāti yathāsakaṃ kammanibbattanavasena. Kaṇhadhammānanti lobhādiekantakāḷakānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ. Vigatattāti pahīnattā. Vigatamalamaccherena cetasāti itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ. Sotāpannassa satoti gehaṃ āvasantassa sotāpannassa samānassa. Nissayavihāranti nissāya viharitabbavihāraṃ, devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakakammaṭṭhānanti attho. Abhibhavitvāti agāraṃ āvasantānaṃ aññesaṃ uppajjanakarāgādiupakkilese abhibhuyya.
如果有人布施任何东西时,还是带着期待心去布施,那他就不是放舍者;但这里说的这个人不是那样,所以才说他是“放舍者”。“放舍的布施”意思是毫无期待地施舍出去。为了说明这一点:就像杀生很多的人被称为“血手”,布施很多的人则被称为“净手”,所以经文说“为了布施,总是洗净双手”。这里“总是”就是一直、经常的意思。“舍离”是指把该布施的东西舍出去,从上下文可以明确知道这个意思。无论什么该布施的东西,乞求者们都会来乞求。乞求的相应,就是“乞求相应”,意思是适合被别人乞求。与布施相应,是因为一直舍离,所以与布施相应。在两者中,也就是在上面说的布施和分享中,他都乐于投入、非常欢喜。巴利
Yo kiñci dentopi sāpekkhova deti, so muttacāgo na hoti, ayaṃ pana na evanti ‘‘muttacāgo’’ti vuttaṃ. Vissaṭṭhacāgoti nirapekkhapariccāgoti attho. Yathā pāṇātipātabahulo puggalo ‘‘lohitapāṇī’’ti vuccati, evaṃ dānabahulo puggalo ‘‘payatapāṇī’’ti vuttoti dassento ‘‘dātuṃ sadā dhotahatthoyevā’’ti āha. Tattha sadāti niccaṃ, abhiṇhanti attho. Pariccāgoti deyyadhammapariccāgoti adhikārato viññāyati. Yaṃ yaṃ deyyadhammaṃ pare yācanakā. Yācane yogo yācanayogo, parehi yācituṃ yuttoti attho. Yājena yuttoti dānena yutto sadā pariccajanato. Ubhayeti yathāvutte dāne, saṃvibhāge ca rato abhirato.
161 就像戒行清净的人,以无残缺等功德随念自己的戒,戒随念的修习就能成就;同样,对于舍清净而广大的人,随念自己毫无染污的舍,修习就能成就。为了说明这一点,才说了“以远离悭吝垢等功德”等话,这些话的意思前面已经讲过了。巴利
161. Yathā parisuddhasīlassa puggalassa akhaṇḍatādiguṇavasena attano sīlassa anussarantassa sīlānussatibhāvanā ijjhati, evaṃ parisuddhauḷārapariccāgassa puggalassa anupakkiliṭṭhameva attano pariccāgaṃ anussarantassa bhāvanā ijjhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘vigatamalamaccheratādiguṇavasenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ vuttatthameva.
“更胜”是指更上的。以广大的量,也就是以广大的尺度、广大的标准,这是它的意思。“以舍为志向”是指心倾向于舍离,倾向、朝向、俯向于舍离。正因为这样,就成为无贪的志向,在任何地方心都不执著。由于对接受布施的人修慈心而行舍离,所以是随顺慈心、慈心修习的,是相应而行的人。“无所畏惧”是指自信,凭自己的功德,在任何地方都不畏缩,是克服一切而安住的人。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Bhiyyosoti uparipi. Mattāya pamāṇassa mahatiyā mattāya, vipulena pamāṇenāti attho. Cāgādhimuttoti pariccāge adhimutto ninnapoṇapabbhāro. Tato eva alobhajjhāsayo katthacipi anabhisaṅgacitto. Paṭiggāhakesu mettāyanavasena pariccāgo hotīti mettāya mettābhāvanāya anulomakārī anurūpapaṭipatti. Visāradoti visado attanova guṇena katthacipi amaṅkubhūto abhibhuyya vihārī. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
6. 天随念的注释巴利
6. Devatānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
162 “依圣道”是指依证得圣道。“已正生起”是指从它真正生起之后向上到达的。因为诸圣者相续中的世间信等,和凡夫的信等,无论何时都完全不能相比。“嬉戏”所以叫天。四大王为彼等之主,所以叫四大王,彼等即四大王天众。三十三位共同修福业者投生到那里,那个与他们相伴共行的处所就叫三十三,住在那里面的天人也因为相伴共行而叫三十三天。从苦中离去、远离了苦,所以叫夜摩天。以喜足之喜来到、到达了,所以叫兜率天。以自己化现的欲乐为欢喜,所以叫化乐天。在他者化现的欲乐中行使自在,所以叫他化自在天。梵天的身体、群体就是梵身,因为属于那一类而生于那里,所以叫梵身天。“比那更高”是指比那些梵身天更高、更上,这是就少光天等而说的。把天人放在见证的位置上,就是像引天人作证一样,随念自己的信等功德:“以这样的道而来的信具足,戒、闻、舍、慧具足,从此世死后投生到那里的那些天人,我也有这样的信、戒、闻、舍、慧。”巴利
162.Ariyamaggavasenāti ariyamaggassa adhigamavasena. Samudāgatehīti sammadeva taduppattito uddhaṃ āgatehi. Yādisā hi ariyānaṃ santāne lokiyāpi saddhādayo, na tādisā kadācipi pothujjanikā saddhādayo. Dibbantīti devā. Cattāro mahārājāno etesanti catumahārājā, te eva cātumahārājikā. Tettiṃsa sahapuññakārino tatthūpapannāti taṃsahacaritaṃ ṭhānaṃ tāvatiṃsaṃ, tannivāsinopi devā taṃsahacaraṇato eva tāvatiṃsā. Dukkhato yātā apayātāti yāmā. Tusāya pītiyā itā upagatāti tusitā. Bhogānaṃ nimmāne rati etesanti nimmānaratino. Paranimmitesu bhogesu vasaṃ vattentīti paranimmitavasavattino. Brahmānaṃ kāyo samūho brahmakāyo, tappariyāpannatāya tattha bhavāti brahmakāyikā. Tatuttarīti tato brahmakāyikehi uttari, upari parittābhādike sandhāya vadati. Devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvāti ‘‘yathārūpāya maggenāgatāya saddhāya samannāgatā, sīlena sutena cāgena paññāya samannāgatā ito cutā tattha upapannā tā devatā, mayhampi tathārūpā saddhā sīlaṃ sutaṃ cāgo paññā ca saṃvijjatī’’ti devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā sakkhiṃ otārentena viya attano saddhādiguṇā anussaritabbā.
如果经中(《增支部》6.10)这样提到了对两种功德的随念,那它到底是怎么说的呢?他思考这个问题后,说道:“然而在经中……”等等。在这里,虽然经中(《增支部》6.10)确实说了“自己的,以及那些天神的”这两方面,看起来好像两者同等重要,但接下来那句“天神的信与戒……”等等,应当把后面的“说”字拉过来连接,理解为“应置于见证的位置”。那么,为什么要置于见证的位置呢?他说:“应当知道,这是为了表明天神与自己具有信等相同的功德。”那为什么在经中不按照字面来理解,而要这样理解它的含义呢?他说:“因为在注释书中……”等等。巴利
Yadi evaṃ sutte (a. ni. 6.10) ubhayaguṇānussaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ kathanti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘sutte panā’’tiādi. Tattha kiñcāpi vuttanti ‘‘attano ca, tāsañca devatāna’’nti ubhayaṃ samadhuraṃ viya sutte (a. ni. 6.10) kiñcāpi vuttaṃ. Atha kho taṃ ‘‘devatānaṃ saddhañca sīlañcā’’tiādivacanaṃ. Sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetabbanti ‘‘vutta’’nti parato padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Kimatthaṃ pana sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapananti āha ‘‘devatānaṃ attano saddhādīhi samānaguṇadīpanatthanti veditabba’’nti. Kasmā pana sutte yathārutavasena atthaṃ aggahetvā evaṃ attho gayhatīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhakathāyañhī’’tiādi.
163 “因此”这句话是说:在注释书里,把天神放在见证者的位置上,然后强化对自己功德的随念,所以才这么说。就像随念戒和随念施那样,在这里,随念自己的功德也是成就禅那的合适因素,因此说“因此”。在前期,也就是修习刚开始的阶段。在后期,是指在修习的时候,能够像这样修习而成就近行禅那。如果这里只应该随念自己的功德,那为什么叫“天随念”呢?回答说:“这是通过随念与天神功德相似的信等功德。”这说明这种修习是因为作意相似之处才被称为“天随念”,并不是随念天神本身,也不是随念他们的功德。或者也可以这样理解:“天随念”这个名称,是依据前期发生的、以天神为所缘的功德随念而安立的。正如接下来会说的:“在前期,是依以天神为所缘而生起的心。”其余内容很容易理解。巴利
163.Tasmāti yasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ devatā sakkhiṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā attano guṇānussaraṇaṃ daḷhaṃ katvā vuttaṃ, sīlacāgānussatīsu viya idhāpi attano guṇānussaraṇaṃ jhānuppattinimittaṃ yuttaṃ, tasmā. Pubbabhāge bhāvanārambhe. Aparabhāgeti yathā bhāventassa upacārajjhānaṃ ijjhati, tathā bhāvanākāle. Yadi attano eva idha guṇā anussaritabbā, kathamayaṃ devatānussatīti āha ‘‘devatānaṃ guṇasadisasaddhādiguṇānussaraṇavasenā’’ti. Tena sadisakappanāya ayaṃ bhāvanā ‘‘devatānussatī’’ti vuttā, na devatānaṃ, tāsaṃ guṇānaṃ vā anussaraṇenāti dasseti. Pubbabhāge vā pavattaṃ devatāguṇānussaraṇaṃ upādāya ‘‘devatānussatī’’ti imissā samaññā veditabbā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘pubbabhāge devatā ārabbha pavattacittavasenā’’ti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
各种杂项的注释巴利
Pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā
164 “这些”是指这六种随念,也就是佛随念等。“详细教导”是指在详细展开的教导中,这是针对《摩诃男经》说的。“‘世尊’等词的含义”就是“世尊”等词句的含义。“义乐”是说依因果而生起的喜悦,“法乐”是说依因而生起的喜悦。因为随念“由远离故,是应供”的人,世尊从烦恼中远离的那个状态就是因。这里所说的因,是指能使人了知的那个,不是造作者,也不是能获得者。通过它而被了知的应供之义就是果。按这个方法,其余词句中的因果区分也应理解。在法随念等当中,也通过“初、中、后皆善”等,以及“然而,因为那是正行道”等,在在处处都作了因的指示。“与法相应的”是指与上述以因和果所摄的功德相应。“功德”是指自己的功德。巴利
164.Etāsanti etāsaṃ buddhānussatiādīnaṃ channaṃ anussatīnaṃ. Vitthāradesanāyanti vitthāravasena pavattadesanāyaṃ, mahānāmasuttaṃ (a. ni. 6.10; 11.11) sandhāya vadati. Bhagavātiādīnaṃ atthanti bhagavātiādīnaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ. Atthavedanti vā hetuphalaṃ paṭicca uppannaṃ tuṭṭhimāha. Dhammavedanti hetuṃ paṭicca uppannaṃ tuṭṭhiṃ. ‘‘Ārakattā araha’’nti anussarantassa hi yaṃ taṃ bhagavato kilesehi ārakattaṃ, so hetu. Ñāpako cettha hetu adhippeto, na kārako, sampāpako vā. Yonena ñāyamāno arahattattho, taṃ phalaṃ. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi hetuphalavibhāgo veditabbo. Dhammānussatiādīsupi ‘‘ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇattā’’tiādinā, ‘‘yasmā pana sā sammāpaṭipadā’’tiādinā ca tattha tattha hetuapadeso katoyevāti. Dhammūpasaṃhitanti yathāvuttahetuhetuphalasaṅkhātaguṇūpasaṃhitaṃ. Guṇeti attano guṇe.
165 “只有圣弟子们才能成就”,这里应当理解为对“圣弟子们才成就”这个后分句的强调,而这个强调是为了显示他们容易成就。因此他说“因为他们确实……”等等。凡夫并不是在所有方面都能成就。正如他接下来要说的“即使如此……”等等。如果真是这样,那为什么在《摩诃男经》(《增支部》6.10; 11.11)等许多经典中,要特别提到“圣弟子”呢?老师们说:因为他们多修习此住。巴利
165.Ariyasāvakānaññevaijjhantīti ariyasāvakānaṃ ijjhantiyevāti uttarapadāvadhāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, avadhāraṇañca tesaṃ sukhasiddhidassanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ hī’’tiādi. Na puthujjanānaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ ijjhantīti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘evaṃ santepī’’tiādi. Yadi evaṃ , kasmā mahānāmasuttādīsu (a. ni. 6.10; 11.11) bahūsu suttesu ariyasāvakaggahaṇaṃ katanti? Tesaṃ bahulavihāratāyāti ācariyā.
“出离”是指已经出去、已经脱离。“解脱”是指已经放开。“出起”是指已经离开。这一切都只是就镇伏而说的。“从贪欲”是指从缠缚。“此亦”是指通过佛随念之力所获得的近行禅。“取为所缘”是指作为条件、作为基础的意思。“净化”是指达到胜义清净。巴利
Nikkhantanti niggataṃ nissaṭaṃ. Muttanti vissaṭṭhaṃ. Vuṭṭhitanti apetaṃ. Sabbametaṃ vikkhambhanameva sandhāya vadati. Gedhamhāti palibodhato. Idampīti buddhānussativasena laddhaṃ upacārajjhānamāha. Ārammaṇaṃ karitvāti paccayaṃ katvā, pādakaṃ katvāti attho. Visujjhantīti paramatthavisuddhiṃ pāpuṇanti.
“逼迫”:就是在被渴爱和杂染等逼迫的、狭窄拥挤的居家生活里。“获得空间”:就是为了证达出世间法而应当获得的空间。随念本身就是随念的处所。“清净法”:就是自性清净,或者能够被清净的。“由于具有胜义清净的性质”:就是因为有证得胜义清净——涅槃的可能性。“通过努力”:就是通过精勤。“令遍净”:就是令它清净。巴利
Sambādheti taṇhāsaṃkilesādinā sampīḷe saṃkaṭe gharāvāse. Okāsādhigamo lokuttaradhammassa adhigamāya adhigantabbaokāso. Anussatiyo eva anussatiṭṭhānāni. Visuddhidhammāti visujjhanasabhāvā, visujjhituṃ vā bhabbā. Paramatthavisuddhidhammatāyāti paramatthavisuddhiyā nibbānassa bhabbabhāvena. Upakkamenāti payogena. Pariyodapanāti visodhanā.
166 即使如此,是说:即使在《摩诃男经》等许多经典里,这六种随念是仅就圣弟子而宣说的。“由彼威力”是指由那种净信的力量。“获得喜之后”是指通过随闻的方式,生起以佛为所缘的喜。巴利
166.Evaṃ santepīti evaṃ mahānāmasuttādīsu anekesu suttesu ariyasāvakasseva vasena chasu anussatīsu desitāsupi. Yassānubhāvenāti yassa cittappasādassa balena. Pītiṃ paṭilabhitvāti anussavavasena buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ uppādetvā.